FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1013 Broadcom 802.11g Mini PCI Card

Reference Guide HP Notebook Series Document Part Number: 370697-001 June 2004 This guide explains how to set up, operate, maintain, and troubleshoot your notebook. It also provides information on battery pack and power management, external device connections, and modem and network connections. The last chapter provides additional reference material on modem commands, safety, and regulatory information. Copyright 2004 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Reference Guide HP Notebook Series First Edition June 2004 Reference Number: ze4900/nx9020/nx9030/nx9040 Document Part Number: 370697-001 Contents 1 Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook . 11 Front Panel and Right Panel Components . 12 Left Panel and Back Panel Components . 13 Bottom Panel Components . 14 Status Lights . 15 Setting Up Your Notebook. 17 Step 1: Insert the Battery Pack . 17 Step 2: Connect AC Power . 18 Step 3: Connect a Phone Line . 19 Step 4: Turn On the Notebook. 110 Step 5: Set Up Windows . 111 2 Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook . 21 Default Power Settings . 22 To Reset the Notebook . 23 To Change the Boot Device. 23 To Use the TouchPad . 24 To Use the Tap to Click Function of the TouchPad . 25 To Use the Function Hot Keys . 26 To Use the One-Touch Buttons . 27 To Use the Windows and Applications Keys . 28 To Type Alternate Graphics Using the ALT GR Key . 29 Reference Guide iii Contents Using CDs or DVDs. 210 To Insert or Remove a CD or DVD. 210 To Play DVD Movies . 211 To Write to DVD Media (Select Models Only) . 212 To Create or Copy CDs . 212 Securing Your Notebook . 213 To Set Up Password Protection . 213 To Lock Your Notebook . 213 To Attach an Optional Security Cable. 214 To Protect Against Viruses . 214 To Lock the Hard Drive. 215 Taking Care of Your Notebook . 215 To Protect Your Hard Drive . 215 To Maintain Your Notebook . 216 To Safeguard Your Data . 216 To Extend the Life of the Display . 217 To Clean Your Notebook . 217 3 Battery Packs and Power Management Managing Power Consumption . 31 How the Notebook Manages Power Automatically . 32 To Change Timeout Settings and Create Power Schemes . 33 Using Battery Power . 33 To Check Battery Status . 33 To Respond to a Low-Battery Warning . 34 To Recharge the Battery Pack . 35 To Get the Most from Your Battery Packs . 35 Disposing of a Used Battery Pack . 37 iv Reference Guide Contents 4 Modem and Network Connections Using the Modem. 41 To Connect the Modem . 42 Special Restrictions in Certain Countries . 43 To Change Your Modem Settings . 44 Connecting to a Local Area Network (LAN). 45 Making Wireless Network Connections (Select Models Only) . 46 To Turn Wireless Communication On and Off . 47 5 Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices. 51 To Insert or Remove a PC Card. 51 To Connect an Audio Device . 53 To Connect a TV to Your Notebook

(Select Models Only). 54 Switching the Display to the External Monitor

(Select Models Only). 55 To Connect a 1394 Device (Select Models Only) . 57 To Connect an Infrared Device (Select Models Only) . 57 Installing Additional RAM (Memory) . 59 To Install a RAM Expansion Module . 59 To Remove a RAM Expansion Module . 510 Replacing the Hard Drive. 512 To Replace the Hard Drive . 512 To Replace the Hard Drive Holder . 513 To Prepare a New Hard Drive . 514 6 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Your Notebook . 61 Audio Problems . 62 CD-ROM and DVD Problems. 63 Reference Guide v Contents Display Problems. 64 Hard Drive Problems . 65 Heat Problems . 66 Infrared Problems . 66 Keyboard and Pointing Device Problems . 67 Local Area Network (LAN) Problems . 68 Memory Problems . 69 Modem Problems. 610 PC Card (PCMCIA) Problems . 613 Performance Problems. 614 Power and Battery Pack Problems. 615 Printing Problems . 618 Serial, Parallel and USB Problems . 619 Startup Problems . 620 Wireless Problems . 621 Configuring Your Notebook . 623 To Run the BIOS Setup Utility . 623 Updating Software and Drivers from the Web . 628 Using System Recovery Features. 628 Safeguarding Your Data . 629 Operating System (OS) CD Repair . 630 OS CD Reinstall . 631 Reinstalling Drivers. 632 Restoring Software Applications. 632 Index vi Reference Guide 1 Getting Started with Your Notebook Identifying Parts of the Notebook Components included with the notebook may vary by geographical region and the features you selected. The following tables identify the standard external components included with most notebook models. Find the illustrations that closely match your notebook to identify your components. Reference Guide 11 Getting Started with Your Notebook Front Panel and Right Panel Components 1 Main status lights (left to right):

power mode, hard drive activity, and battery 2 TouchPad, scroll pad, Click buttons, and an on-off button 3 Power button: turns the notebook on and off 7 CD-ROM, DVD, or other drive 8 Battery pack 9 Wireless on-off button and indicator light (select models only) 4 Keyboard status lights

- Infrared port (select models only) 5 One-Touch buttons q Hard drive 6 Notebook open/close latch 12 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Left Panel and Back Panel Components 1 AC adapter jack 2 Universal serial bus (USB) ports 9 RJ-11 jack: connects the modem cable

- PC Card and CardBus slot and button (select models only;

location varies by model) 3 RJ-45 jack: connects a network cable q IEEE 1394 port

(select models only) 4 S-Video out jack

(select models only) 5 Parallel port (LPT1): use this port for a parallel printer or other parallel device (select models only) 6 Serial port (COM1): use this port for a serial mouse, modem, printer, or other serial device

(select models only) 7 External monitor port 8 Cable lock slot (security connector) w Audio jacks (left to right):

external microphone, audio out

(headphones) e Volume control r Audio mute button and audio mute light t Diskette drive

(select models only) Reference Guide 13 Getting Started with Your Notebook Bottom Panel Components 1 Hard drive 2 Battery latch 3 RAM (memory) cover 4 Reset button 5 Mini PCI cover

(no user parts inside) CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a Mini PCI device authorized for use in your notebook by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore notebook functionality. Then contact Customer Care. 14 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Status Lights The notebook includes a number of status lights that report power and battery status, drive activity, and keyboard functions such as Caps Lock and Num Lock. The following diagram shows the main status lights on the front of the notebook. 1 Power mode Onnotebook is on (even if the display is off) Blinkingnotebook is in Standby Offnotebook is off or in Hibernation 2 Hard drive activity Onnotebook is accessing the hard drive 3 Battery status GreenAC adapter is connected and the battery pack is fully charged AmberAC adapter is connected and the battery pack is charging BlinkingAC adapter is connected and the battery pack is missing or has a fault OffAC adapter is not connected Reference Guide 15 Getting Started with Your Notebook The keyboard status lights, located above the keyboard, indicate the states of the keyboard locks. 1 Caps Lock On: Caps Lock is active. 2 Num Lock On: Num Lock is active. (The Keypad Lock must also be on to use the embedded keypad.) 3 Keypad Lock On: The embedded keypad is active (Fn+F8). Num Lock must also be on for the numeric keys. Otherwise, cursor control is active (as marked on an external keyboard). 16 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Setting Up Your Notebook WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety &

Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the hard drive or on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. When you set up your notebook for the first time, you will connect the AC adapter, charge the battery pack, turn on the notebook, and run the Microsoft Windows Setup program. Step 1: Insert the Battery Pack WARNING: Do not mutilate or puncture battery packs. Do not dispose of battery packs in fire, or they can burst or explode, releasing hazardous chemicals. Rechargeable battery packs must be recycled or disposed of properly. To install the battery pack:

1. Turn the notebook upside down. 2. Insert the connector end of the battery pack into the battery pack compartment, then slide the battery pack in until it latches. Reference Guide 17 Getting Started with Your Notebook Step 2: Connect AC Power CAUTION: Use only the AC adapter included with your notebook (or other approved adapter that meets the power requirements of the notebook). Using the wrong AC adapter could damage the notebook or adapter, cause data loss, and may void your warranty. 1. Plug the AC adapter into the notebook. 2. Connect the power cord to the AC adapter. 3. Plug the power cord into a wall outlet. The notebook battery starts charging. When unplugging the power cord, unplug it from the outlet before unplugging it from the AC adapter. While the battery pack is charging, you can continue with the section Step 3: Connect a Phone Line. 18 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Step 3: Connect a Phone Line 1. Make sure the telephone line is an analog line, sometimes called a data line. (Do not use a digital line.) 2. Connect the telephone cord (RJ-11) into a telephone jack. 3. Plug the other end of the telephone cord into the RJ-11 modem jack on the notebook. For details about using the modem, see Using the Modem. Reference Guide 19 Getting Started with Your Notebook Step 4: Turn On the Notebook Press the power button above the left side of the keyboard. The notebook boots up, and Windows starts automatically. If your notebook does not turn on when operating on battery power, the battery pack may be out of power. Plug in the AC adapter, then press the power button again. Leave the AC adapter plugged in for several hours to fully charge the battery pack. Charge times will vary. WARNING: This notebook is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the notebook to feel warm or hot when used continuously. To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or use the notebook on your lap for extended periods. The notebook complies with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment

(IEC 60950). 110 Reference Guide Getting Started with Your Notebook Step 5: Set Up Windows Your notebook has the Microsoft Windows operating system preinstalled on its hard drive. The first time you turn on your notebook, the Windows Setup program runs automatically and includes opportunities to customize your setup. 1. Follow the Setup program instructions on the screen. If the program prompts you to enter the Product ID code, locate the code on the bottom of the notebook. 2. Check the modem country or region settings. Select Start >

Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Phone and Modem Options, then choose your country/region. Reference Guide 111 2 Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook You can start and stop your notebook by using the power button. At other times, power considerations, types of active connections, and startup time may cause you to use alternative methods to start or stop your notebook. This chapter describes several methods. Reference Guide 21 Basic Operation Default Power Settings Power mode To enter this mode Function ONPower status light will turnon. Briefly press the power button. OFFPower status light will turn off. StandbyPower status light will blink. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If the system has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds to turn off the notebook. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Stand By.

-or-

Allow the system to time out. Powers on the notebook. Powers off the notebook. Saves significant power. Turns off the display and other components. Maintains current session in RAM. Restarts quickly. Restores network connections. HibernationPower status light will turn off. If the notebook is already on, briefly press the power button.

-or-

Press Fn+F12.

-or-

Allow the system to time out. Saves maximum power. Saves current session to disk, then shuts down. Restores network connections. You can also customize the way these power modes work. See the Battery Packs and Power Management chapter in this guide. 22 Reference Guide Basic Operation To Reset the Notebook Occasionally, you may find that Windows or the notebook has stopped responding and will not let you turn off the notebook. If this happens, try the following procedures in this order:

If possible, shut down Windows. Press ctrl+alt+del, then select Shut Down > Restart.

-or-

Press the power button for at least 4 seconds until the display shuts down. Unsaved data will be lost. Press the power button again to restart.

-or-

Insert the tip of a paper clip into the reset button on the bottom of the notebook, then press the power button to restart. To Change the Boot Device The notebook normally boots from its internal hard drive. You can also boot the notebook from a diskette drive, a CD-ROM drive, or an internal network interface card. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. 2. When the logo screen appears, press esc to display the Boot menu. 3. Use the arrow keys to select the boot device, then press enter. If you want to boot from a specific device whenever it is present, change the boot order using the BIOS Setup utility. See Configuring Your Notebook in the Troubleshooting chapter in this guide. Reference Guide 23 Basic Operation To Use the TouchPad The TouchPad includes an on-off button so you can turn off the TouchPad to avoid moving the pointer accidentally when you are typing. The indicator light turns off when you turn off the TouchPad. 1 Click buttons. The Click buttons work like the left and right buttons on a standard mouse 2 TouchPad (touch-sensitive pointing device). 3 TouchPad on-off button and indicator light. 4 Scroll pad. The scroll pad scrolls vertically to display the contents of the active window. 24 Reference Guide Basic Operation To Use the Tap to Click Function of the TouchPad The Tap to Click function of your TouchPad is enabled by default. To disable it, follow the instructions included here:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware >

Mouse. The Mouse Properties dialog box opens. 2. Select the Tapping tab. 3. In the left panel, clear the Tapping check box. 4. Select Apply > OK. The Tap to Click function is now disabled. Reference Guide 25 Basic Operation To Use the Function Hot Keys Fn The combination of the Fn key plus another key creates a hot keya shortcut key sequencefor various system controls. To use a hot key, press and hold Fn, press the appropriate second key, then release both keys. This hot key Does this Fn+F1 Fn+F2 Fn+F5 Fn+F8 Fn+F12 Fn+NumLock Fn+Page Up Fn+Page Down Fn+Backspace Decreases the display brightness. Increases the display brightness. Toggles the external monitor on and off. Toggles the built-in keypad on and off. Does not affect an external keyboard. If Num Lock is on, then the numeric functions are active;

otherwise, cursor control is active (as marked on an external keyboard). Initiates Hibernation. Toggles Scroll Lock on and off. Increases the audio volume and cancels the mute setting. Decreases the audio volume. Mutes/unmutes the audio output. 26 Reference Guide Basic Operation To Use the One-Touch Buttons Your notebook includes 5 One-Touch buttons that can start any application or open a document or Web site by pressing a single key. Press a One-Touch button to open the corresponding application, document, or Web site. To program a One-Touch button:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Utilities > One-Touch. 2. On the One-Touch tab, select the button you want to reprogram. 3. Type a label for the button, then select the application, document, folder, or Web site you want the button to open. 4. If you want a label to appear onscreen when you press a One-Touch button, select that option on the Onscreen Display tab. Reference Guide 27 Basic Operation To Use the Windows and Applications Keys The Windows key brings up the Windows Start menu. This is the same as selecting the Start button on the taskbar. The Applications key brings up the shortcut menu for the selected item. This is the same menu that appears when you right-click while pointing at the selected item. This key combination Does this Windows key+E Windows key+F1 Windows key+F Windows key+M Shift+Windows key+M Runs Windows Explorer Runs Windows Help Runs Windows Find: Search Minimizes all displayed windows Returns all minimized windows to original size Windows key+R Runs the Windows Run dialog box 28 Reference Guide Basic Operation To Type Alternate Graphics Using the ALT GR Key Non-U.S. keyboards have an ALT GR key to the right of the spacebar and keys on the keyboard that show International characters. These special characters appear on the lower-right corner of some keys on the keyboard. For example:

1 2 3 1 Shifted 2 Unshifted 3 ALT GR To type an ALT GR character, press and hold the ALT GR key, then press the key containing the ALT GR character you want to display. If your keyboard does not have an ALT GR key, you can use the ALT key instead of the ALT GR key to get the same result. Reference Guide 29 Basic Operation Using CDs or DVDs To Insert or Remove a CD or DVD CAUTION: Do not remove a CD or DVD while the notebook is reading it, or the notebook could stop responding and you could lose data. To avoid damage to the disk or drive, be sure to press the CD or DVD firmly onto the spindle. The location of the CD or DVD drive varies by model. 1. Press the button on the face of the CD or DVD drive. If you are using this drive for the first time, be sure to remove the cardboard packing insert if present. 2. Press the CD or DVD gently but firmly onto the spindle (label facing up).

-or-

Remove the CD or DVD. 3. Slide the tray back into the module to close it. If your notebook loses power, you can manually open the drive to remove a CD. Insert a straightened paper clip into the recessed hole on the front of the drive to open it. 210 Reference Guide Basic Operation To Play DVD Movies If your notebook is equipped with a DVD or other DVD readable drive, it also includes DVD player software that lets you play DVD movies. Select Start > All Programs > Multimedia > DVD Player >

InterVideo WinDVD. For best performance while playing movies on battery power, set the Control Panel Power Scheme to Portable/Laptop. DVDs can have regional codes embedded in the disc data. These codes prevent DVD movies from being played outside the region of the world in which they are sold. If you get a region code error, you are trying to play a DVD intended for a different region. Most DVD drives let you change the region code only a limited number of times (usually no more than 4). When you reach this limit, your last change to the region code will be hard-coded on the DVD drive and will be permanent. Your warranty does not cover the expense of correcting this situation. Refer to the Help for your DVD player software for details about setting region codes. Reference Guide 211 Basic Operation To Write to DVD Media (Select Models Only) If your notebook is equipped with a DVD+RW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive, you must install your DVD burning software from the CDs included with your notebook before you can write to DVD media. When writing to DVD+R or DVD+RW media, observe the following guidelines:

Place the notebook on a flat, stable surface. Ensure that the AC adapter is connected to the notebook and an AC electrical outlet. Close and exit all other software applications, except the CD burning software (when writing a data disc) or DVD burning software (when writing a video disc). To Create or Copy CDs If your notebook is equipped with a DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive, it also includes CD software that lets you copy or create CDs. Follow the instructions that are included with the software. Read and write quality may vary by media. 212 Reference Guide Basic Operation Securing Your Notebook To Set Up Password Protection You can protect your notebook from access by another user when you set up password protection, which is available through Windows and through the BIOS Setup utility. See Configuring Your Notebook in the Troubleshooting chapter. For complete protection, set passwords in Windows as well as through BIOS Setup. To cancel password protection, set an empty password. Windows 1. Select Start > Control Panel > User Accounts, then select your account. 2. Select Create a Password, then set the password. 3. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. 4. On the Advanced tab, select the option to prompt for a password when the notebook leaves Standby. To Lock Your Notebook To protect against unauthorized access while your notebook is running, lock the notebook before leaving it unattended, or set up a screen saver with a Windows password. You can lock the notebook these ways:

If a One-Touch button is assigned to Quick Lock, press that button.

-or-

Press ctrl+alt+del, then select Lock Computer. To unlock the notebook, follow your normal logon steps. Reference Guide 213 Basic Operation To Attach an Optional Security Cable Your notebook includes a built-in connector to secure the notebook with a cable and a lock (such as the Kensington MicroSaver lock system, available at many computer stores). 1. Wrap the cable around a secure object. 2. Insert the cable into the security cable slot on the notebook. 3. Lock it with the cable lock key, then store the key in a safe place away from the notebook. To Protect Against Viruses Virus-protection software can help protect the integrity of your data. This is especially important if you use the Web. Your notebook comes equipped with Norton AntiVirus software. Because new viruses appear frequently, you will also want to keep the program virus definitions up to date. Norton AntiVirus updates are on the Web at http://www.symantec.com. You can also get detailed instructions from the programs online Help. 214 Reference Guide Basic Operation To Lock the Hard Drive The notebook enables you to lock its internal hard drive to help keep your information secure. CAUTION: When you enable the hard drive lock, the current BIOS user password (or administrator password if that is the only password set) is encoded on the hard drive. If you move the hard drive to another notebook, you cannot access the drive until you set the user (or administrator) password to match the drive password. After you match the drive password, you can change the notebook (and drive) password. If you forget the password, you cannot recover your data. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. 2. When the logo screen appears, press F2 to enter the BIOS Setup utility. 3. From the Security menu, enable Password Required to Boot. 4. From the Security menu, enable Internal hard drive lock. 5. Press F10 to save and exit BIOS Setup. Taking Care of Your Notebook Follow these recommendations to maintain your notebook during everyday use and prevent potential physical damage or data loss. To Protect Your Hard Drive Hard drives, as well as other internal components, are not indestructible and can be damaged by inappropriate handling and operation. Avoid bumps or jolts. Do not operate the notebook while traveling over bumpy terrain. Reference Guide 215 Basic Operation Put the notebook in Standby or shut it down before transporting it. This turns off the hard drive. A drop of a few inches onto a rigid surface while the hard drive is operating could destroy data or damage the drive. Carry the notebook in a padded case to protect against bumps and jolts. Set down the notebook gently. To Maintain Your Notebook Provide adequate ventilation around the notebook. Always set the notebook on a flat surface, so that air can flow freely around and underneath it. Always shut down the notebook or put it in Hibernation mode before putting it in a carrying case or other enclosed space. Do not pick up or carry the notebook by its display. Do not use the notebook outside in the rain or snow

(inclement weather). If the notebook is cold, warm it gradually to avoid condensation. Maintain your battery pack for best performance. See the Battery Packs and Power Management chapter. To Safeguard Your Data Do not use a pointing device or activate any other device that interrupts operation while the system is starting or stopping. Back up your work regularly. Copy files to diskettes, CDs, DVDs, and other media, or network drives. Use a virus-scanning program (such as the Norton AntiVirus program included with your notebook) to check your files and operating system. Check your disk using the Tools tab in the disk Properties window. 216 Reference Guide Basic Operation To Extend the Life of the Display Set the display brightness to the lowest comfortable level

(Fn+F1). When working at your desk, connect an external monitor and turn off the internal display (press the optional TV Now!

One-Touch button at the top of the keyboard). If you are not using an external monitor, set the Turn off monitor timeouts (for both AC and battery pack operation) to the shortest comfortable interval. Avoid using a screen saver or other software that prevents the notebook from changing to Display-off or Standby mode after a timeout period. If you use a screen saver, enable the option to shut off the display after a time delay. Do not disable Display-off or Standby timeouts. If you are using AC power and have no external monitor attached, put the notebook in Standby mode when not in use. To Clean Your Notebook You can clean the notebook with a soft cloth dampened with clean water or with water containing a mild detergent. Do not use an excessively wet cloth, and take care to keep water out of the case. Do not use abrasive cleaners, especially on the display. Do not apply any cleaner directly to the display. Instead, apply the cleaner to a soft cloth, then gently wipe the display. Reference Guide 217 3 Battery Packs and Power Management Managing Power Consumption When you are running your notebook on battery power, you can maximize operating time without compromising performance. Your notebook is designed to help you reduce power consumption and extend battery life. During idle periods, the notebook automatically enters power-saving modes after specified timeout periods. You can adjust these timeouts to suit your working habits. Reference Guide 31 Battery Packs and Power Management How the Notebook Manages Power Automatically Your notebook enters Hibernation and Standby automatically, and turns off the hard drive and display based on values set in Windows. When this occurs The result is To resume No keyboard, pointing device, or other input activity occurs for the specified interval The hard drive is not accessed for a specified interval No pointing devices are used, no disk drive is accessed, and no port

(serial, parallel, or infrared) is active for the specified interval The notebook stays in Standby for the specified interval Display turns off. Turns off the display to conserve battery power and extend the life of the display. Hard drive turns off. This is usually set to occur shortly after the display is turned off. Standby is initiated. Maintains your current session in RAM, and turns off the display and other components to conserve battery power. Briefly press any key or move a pointing device to turn on the display. Begin using the notebook, and the hard drive turns on. Briefly press the power button to return to your current session. Hibernation is initiated. Saves your current session to the hard drive, and turns off the notebook. Press the power button to return to your previous session. CAUTION: Make a habit of saving your work before allowing your notebook to enter Standby. If power is interrupted while the notebook is in Standby, any information that was not saved will be lost. The notebook can also enter Hibernation if battery power reaches a critically low level. If this happens, you will find on resuming that all your data has been saved, but some functions may be disabled. To resume normal operation, restore power by connecting an AC adapter or installing a charged battery pack, then shut the notebook off and restart it. 32 Reference Guide Battery Packs and Power Management To Change Timeout Settings and Create Power Schemes You can adjust the length of timeouts after which your notebook automatically shuts down components or enters a power-saving mode. You can also save these settings as a power scheme. 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options. 2. Select the Power Schemes tab, then enter the settings you want. If you do not want a particular timeout to occur, set the value to Never. See Windows Help for details. If you want to save the settings as a power scheme, select Save As and enter a name for the scheme. CAUTION: Do not disable Hibernate support in the Power Options settings or you will lose any unsaved data if the battery pack runs down completely. Using Battery Power To Check Battery Status From the battery status light Check the battery status light on the notebook. From the Windows taskbar The Windows taskbar can display a power icon that provides detailed battery status information (see Windows Help for details). The icon resembles a battery when a battery pack is the notebooks sole source of power. Place the pointer over the power icon to display the remaining battery charge. This value is shown as either a percentage of charge remaining or as time remaining. Select the power icon to open the Battery Meter window. Reference Guide 33 Battery Packs and Power Management From the Windows Control Panel Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options, then select the Power Meter tab to see the battery status. The Alarms and Advanced tabs provide additional power information options. On the battery pack 1. Remove the battery pack from the notebook. See the Getting Started with Your Notebook chapter in this guide. 2. Press the contact pad on the side of the battery pack. The number of lights that turn on indicates the remaining charge

(each light represents 20 percent of a full charge). To Respond to a Low-Battery Warning The notebook automatically alerts you when the battery power drops to a critically low level. The notebook first emits a high-pitched beep or displays a warning message. Then, if you do not restore power within a short time, the notebook goes into Hibernation. After the notebook enters Hibernation in this way, you will not be able to turn it on again until you restore power by doing one of the following procedures:

Replace the battery pack with a charged one. Plug in the AC adapter. If you plug in the AC adapter, you can continue to work while your battery pack recharges. 34 Reference Guide Battery Packs and Power Management To Recharge the Battery Pack CAUTION: The AC adapter is normally warm when plugged into an AC outlet. The notebook is normally warm while recharging. Do not recharge the notebook in a briefcase or other confined space, or the battery pack could overheat. Plug the AC adapter into the notebook. Charging can take several hours. If you continue working while the battery pack charges, the charging time may increase. The operating time for a fully charged battery pack depends on the notebook model, power management settings, and level of use. To Get the Most from Your Battery Packs Follow these suggestions to make your battery power last as long as possible:

Plug in the AC adapter, especially when using a CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive, or any external connections such as a PC Card or a modem. Set the display brightness to the lowest comfortable level

(Fn+F1). Put the notebook in Standby when you will not be using it for a short while. Put the notebook in Hibernation whenever you want to save your current session but will not be using the notebook for a day or more. Set the automatic timeout settings to emphasize saving power. If your notebook has a multispeed processor, use the lower speed on battery power (the default settings conserve battery power). Reference Guide 35 Battery Packs and Power Management If your notebook has a wireless on-off button, turn off the wireless function when you are not using it. Press the wireless on-off button to turn off the light. If you have a PC Card, such as a network card, remove it when you are not using it. Some PC Cards use significant power even while they are inactive. If you work with an application that uses the serial port or a PC Card, exit the application when you finish using it. In addition, follow these suggestions to extend the life of your battery packs:

Do not leave battery packs unused for long periods. If you have more than one, rotate them. Unplug the AC adapter when the notebook is not in use. If the notebook will be unused and unplugged for more than 2 weeks, remove and store the battery pack. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the battery pack, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. High temperatures accelerate the self-discharge rate of a stored battery pack. To prolong the charge of a stored battery pack, place it in a cool, dry location. To maintain the accuracy of battery charge displays, calibrate a battery pack that has been stored for one month or more before using it. Avoid using or charging battery packs at high temperatures. 36 Reference Guide Battery Packs and Power Management Disposing of a Used Battery Pack WARNING: There is a risk of fire and chemical burn if a battery pack is handled improperly. Do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery pack or short the contacts on a battery pack. Do not expose a battery pack to temperatures higher than 60C (140F) or dispose of a battery pack in water or fire. When a battery pack has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of it in general household waste. In Europe, dispose of or recycle battery packs by using the public collection system or by returning them to HP, your service partner, or their agents. In other regions, refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet, included with the notebook, to contact HP and request information about battery pack disposal. For more information about battery pack precautions and disposal and the complete text of governmental agency notices, refer to the Regulatory and Safety Notices guide on the Documentation CD. Reference Guide 37 4 Modem and Network Connections Using the Modem You can connect your modem to a telephone line and communicate throughout the world. You can explore the Internet, send and receive e-mail messages, and use your notebook to send and receive faxes. Your notebook contains several software programs that work with your modem:

Internet Explorer, for browsing the World Wide Web Outlook Express, for sending and receiving e-mail messages Windows Fax Console, for sending and receiving faxes For best performance, you can connect to any Internet Service Provider (ISP) or modem network that has V.90 or V.92 interoperable modems. Check with your ISP for a list of telephone numbers that support V.90 or V.92. (V.92 enables modem on-hold technology that allows an Internet session to be interrupted to answer a phone call, then resumes the Internet session after the call is complete.) The maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 Kbps, even though the modem is capable of downloading at higher speeds. Reference Guide 41 Modem and Network Connections To Connect the Modem CAUTION: Your built-in modem may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX), cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and does not work with party lines. Some of these connections may result in excess electrical voltage and could cause a malfunction in the internal modem. Check your telephone line type prior to connecting your phone line. 42 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections Special Restrictions in Certain Countries Many countries impose a blackout period after a modem repeatedly fails to connect to a service provider. The number of failed attempts and the period you must wait before trying again differ from country to country. Check with your telephone company. For example, if you are dialing from Italy and fail to connect to your server or cancel the connection, you must wait 1 minute before dialing that number again. If you dial before then, you will get the message delay. After the fourth failed connection, you must wait 1 hour before trying the number again. If you dial before the hour is up, you will get the message black list. When using a modem, an external surge protector can prevent notebook damage by lightning or other electrical surges. Connect any approved surge protector to the modem cable whenever you are using the modem. Reference Guide 43 Modem and Network Connections To Change Your Modem Settings The modem is already set up to be compatible with telephone systems and modems in most areas. However, in some situations, you may have to change modem settings to match local conditions. If you have questions about local requirements, contact your telephone company. Control Panel. Open Phone and Modem Options in Control Panel to change many modem settings. On the Modems tab, select Properties to set connection speeds, or on the Dialing Rules tab, select Edit to set dialing options. Communications software. Many communications applications provide options for controlling modem settings. See the Help for your software. AT commands. You can control many aspects of modem operation using modem AT commands. AT commands are special strings of characters sent to the modem to set up specific conditions. Those command strings normally start with AT. For a list of AT commands for the built-in modem, see the Documentation CD. Open Phone and Modem Options in Control Panel. On the Modems tab, select Properties. You can type AT commands on the Advanced tab in the space for extra settings. 44 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections Connecting to a Local Area Network (LAN) You can connect to local area networks (LANs). LANs give you access to network resources, such as printers and file servers on your corporate network, and possibly to the Internet. To connect to a LAN:

1. Check that the existing LAN supports Ethernet 10Base-T

(10 Mbps) or 100Base TX (100 Mbps) connections. 2. Plug the LAN cable (not supplied) into the built-in LAN port. The cable must have an RJ-45 connector. 3. Windows automatically detects and sets up a LAN connection. To edit settings, open Network and Dial-up Connections in Control Panel. See Windows Help for information about setting up and using LAN connections. Select Start > Help and Support. Contact your network administrator for network information. Two lights at the LAN port indicate the connection status:

The yellow light indicates network activity. The green light indicates a 100 Mbps link. Reference Guide 45 Modem and Network Connections Making Wireless Network Connections (Select Models Only) If your notebook includes a wireless on-off button, you can connect by radio to an 802.11 wireless local area network

(WLAN) and access computers and other resources on the network. A wireless network provides all the functions of a typical wired network, but also provides for roaming. Since your notebook connects to the network by radio rather than through cables, you can move from place to place within the networkfrom your office to a conference room, for exampleand remain on the network the entire time. WARNING: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antenna should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches) during normal operation, including when the notebook display is closed. 46 Reference Guide Modem and Network Connections To Turn Wireless Communication On and Off For instructions to enable WLAN communications, refer to the Go Wireless booklet included with your notebook (select models only). Wireless networks and cellular modems are examples of devices that use wireless communication. Such devices may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as when traveling in an airplane. If in doubt, be sure to ask for authorization before turning on your notebook wireless networking. In Italy, Singapore, and possibly other countries, you may be required to purchase a license before using the wireless function. Turning On Communication and Making a Connection If your notebook has wireless 802.11 capabilities, the wireless indicator light on the front of the notebook turns on when 802.11 communication is turned on. You must use the Wireless Configuration software to control the individual wireless functions. 1. If the notebook is not on, turn it on. 2. If you normally press the wireless on-off button on the front of the notebook to turn wireless 802.11 communication on and off, press the button so the indicator light turns on. This restores your previous wireless configuration.

-or-

Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections > Network Connections, then select the wireless network connection icon. If you are within range of your wireless network, your notebook automatically connects. To check the status of your wireless connection, open Network Connections in Control Panel, then select the connection. Reference Guide 47 Modem and Network Connections Turning Off Communication and Ending a Connection 1. Close any files that reside on other network notebooks. 2. To turn off the wireless 802.11 communication without turning off the notebook, press the wireless on-off button.

-or-

Right-click the wireless network connection icon in the taskbar, then select Disable. Putting the notebook in Standby or shutting it down also turns off the wireless function. 48 Reference Guide 5 Add-On Devices Connecting External Devices To Insert or Remove a PC Card The notebook PC Card slot supports standard Type II and Type III PC Cards (PCMCIA and CardBus). The location and number of the PC Card slots vary by model series. Inserting a PC Card 1. Hold the PC Card label side up and its connectors facing the card slot. 2. Aligning the PC Card along the bottom of the slot, slide the PC Card until it is seated. Most cards are properly seated when the outer edge is flush with the casing of the notebook, but some cards are designed to protrude from the case. Reference Guide 51 Add-On Devices Removing a PC Card CAUTION: Before removing a PC Card, you must use the Eject Hardware or Safely Remove Hardware icon in the taskbar, or shut down the notebook. Otherwise, you could lose data. 1. Select the Eject Hardware or Safely Remove Hardware icon in the taskbar, select the card you want to remove, then remove the card. This protects your data and helps avoid unexpected problems. If needed, you can restart the card by reinserting it. 2. Press the eject button to extend the button, then press the button again to eject the PC Card. Before you connect any device, check its documentation to see if you need to make any settings or adjustments to the equipment before using it. This might include setting switches to configure the equipment so that it will operate properly with your notebook and the software you plan to use. 52 Reference Guide Add-On Devices To Connect an Audio Device You can plug in an external microphone, external speakers, or headphones. CAUTION: The headphone and line-in jacks are three-terminal stereo jacks. They are not compatible with two-terminal mono plugs. Connecting a mono plug into either of these jacks may damage the notebook. Attach the audio cable to the corresponding audio port on the notebook. Match your notebook to one of the following illustrations and locate the audio ports on your notebook. 1 External microphone connector (pink) 2 Audio out (headphones) connector (green) When you plug a device into the headphone port, the built in speakers automatically turn off. Reference Guide 53 Add-On Devices To Connect a TV to Your Notebook

(Select Models Only) 1. Plug a standard 4-pin S-Video cable to the optional S-Video out jack on your notebook (yellow connector on the back panel). Plug the other end of the cable to the S-Video in jack on your television. Although your notebook may have a 7-pin S-Video out jack, the notebook accepts either a 7-pin or 4-pin cable connection. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes >

Display. Then, select the Settings tab > Advanced button >

Display tab. 3. To enable the TV, select the red button next to TV. If the S-Video cable is not plugged into your notebook and TV, the red button will not be displayed. 4. Select Apply to accept the changes. 5. If you are prompted to restart Windows, select Yes. 54 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Switching the Display to the External Monitor (Select Models Only) Press the TV Now! One-Touch button, which is identified with a TV icon, at the top of your keyboard to switch the display to the TV-Out mode. If a TV is not connected to the notebook, your default media application will launch. Adjusting Monitor Resolution and Other Settings 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes >

Display. 2. On the Settings tab, adjust the Screen area. Other settings are also available. If you need to increase the refresh rate on the external monitor, you can switch to only the external monitor. An alternative is to make one display a secondary display so you can select independent refresh rates:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes >

Display. 2. On the Settings tab, select the Advanced button, then the Display or Monitor tab. Set the refresh rate on the Monitor tab. Reference Guide 55 Add-On Devices Using Dual Display Mode You can extend your desktop by connecting an external monitor to your notebook. 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes >

Display. 2. Select the Settings tab. 3. Select the second display, then select the option to extend the desktop. You can set different resolutions and numbers of colors for each display. However, using the Extended Desktop requires video memory for each display. For this reason, higher resolutions and higher numbers of colors may cause unexpected behavior on the displays. Try starting with 1024 768 resolution on the external display and 64 K colors (16-bit) on both displays. You can then try higher settings to see whether they work for your applications. In addition, certain operations such as playing DVDs and running 3D graphics require extra video memory, so you may have to adjust display settings. If you play a DVD movie, the movie will show only on the primary display. To change the primary display, go to the Settings tab of Display Properties (see the steps above), right-click the display you want, and select Primary. 56 Reference Guide Add-On Devices To Connect a 1394 Device

(Select Models Only) If your notebook has a 1394 port (also known as firewire), you can use it to connect devices such as audio and video equipment, disk drives, printers, and other notebooks. Attach the device cable to the 1394 port. Windows automatically recognizes the device. The 1394 port is a 4-wire port. If you want to connect a device that has a 6-wire plug, you can purchase a simple adapter if the device is unpowered, or a hub if the device requires power. If you have problems making this connection, go to the device manufacturer Web site for the latest version of the driver for the device. To Connect an Infrared Device

(Select Models Only) Select models include an infrared port. By default, the infrared port is enabled. If your model has an infrared port (a small, rectangular lens located on the front of the notebook), then your notebook has wireless serial communication capability. That is, your notebook and other infrared devices, such as printers or other notebooks, can communicate wirelessly using this port. Reference Guide 57 Add-On Devices Using the Infrared Port Make sure the infrared port of your notebook and the infrared port of the device with which you want to communicate are positioned in a straight line facing each other. The 2 ports should be no more than 3.3 feet (1 meter) apart with no obstructions in between. Noise from nearby equipment can cause transmission errors. To check the status of communications, open Wireless Link by selecting Start > Control Panel > Printers & Other Hardware > Wireless Link. Avoiding Standby While Using Infrared Standby is not compatible with infrared transmission. If the notebook is in Standby, an infrared transmission cannot be initiated. If Standby is initiated during an infrared transmission, the transmission stops. The transmission should resume when the notebook exits Standby, or you may need to resend the infrared transmission. To exit Standby, briefly press the power button. Printing to an Infrared Printer Install your printer and assign it to the notebook infrared port. You can then print from your applications as you would to any other printer. Transferring Files Through an Infrared Connection You can use your notebook infrared port to transfer files by using Wireless Link. See the Windows online Help for instructions on using Wireless Link. 58 Reference Guide Add-On Devices Installing Additional RAM (Memory) The notebook has 2 slots that hold 2 RAM modules. At least 1 slot contains a RAM module installed at the factory. You can use both slots to expand your RAM. To Install a RAM Expansion Module Use only PC2100 DDR-266 MHz or higher RAM. You will need a small Phillips screwdriver for these steps. CAUTION: The internal components of your notebook are extremely sensitive to static electricity and can be permanently damaged by it. Handle the RAM module only by its edges. Before installing the memory module, discharge static electricity by touching the metal shielding around the connectors on the back of the notebook. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. 2. Unplug the AC adapter, if present, then remove the battery pack. 3. Turn the unit bottom-side up, loosen the screws holding the RAM cover, then remove the cover. Reference Guide 59 Add-On Devices 4. Insert the RAM board into the connector at about a 30-degree angle until it is fully inserted. Then press down at both sides until both latches snap closed. 5. Replace the cover. 6. Insert the battery pack. To Remove a RAM Expansion Module You may want to remove a RAM module so you can install a larger one. You will need a small Phillips screwdriver for these steps. CAUTION: Your notebook internal components are extremely sensitive to static electricity and can be permanently damaged by it. Handle the RAM module only by its edges. Before installing the memory module, discharge static electricity by touching the metal shielding around the connectors on the back of the notebook. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. 2. Unplug the AC adapter, if present, then remove the battery pack. 3. Turn the unit bottom-side up, loosen the screws holding the RAM cover, then remove the cover. 510 Reference Guide Add-On Devices 4. Release the 2 latches at the sides of the RAM board, so the free edge of the board pops up. Match your notebook to the following illustration. 5. Pull the board out of the connector. 6. Replace the cover. 7. Insert the battery pack. Reference Guide 511 Add-On Devices Replacing the Hard Drive To Replace the Hard Drive You will need a small Phillips screwdriver for this procedure. 1. Unplug the AC adapter, if connected. 2. Remove the battery pack. 3. Turn the unit bottom side up. 4. Use a pointed tool to remove the plugs from the 2 or 3 screw holes, then remove the screws. The number of screws varies by model. Match your notebook to the following illustration. 5. Gently pull the hard drive out of the notebook. 6. Gently slide the new drive into the hard drive compartment. Press firmly to make sure the connector seats properly. 7. Reinstall the hard drive screws and plugs. If you are installing a new hard drive, you should create a Utility partition on the drive before loading any software. 512 Reference Guide Add-On Devices To Replace the Hard Drive Holder If you are installing a new hard drive that does not have a holder, you can remove the holder parts from the hard drive you are removing. You will need a small Phillips screwdriver for this procedure. 1. Remove the 4 screws from the sides of the holder and drive case, then slide the drive out of the holder. 2. Notice that the hard drive has a pin connector attachment at one end. Carefully remove this connector from the end of the drive. Work alternately at each end so that the connector slides off evenly without bending the connector pins. 3. Carefully put the pin connector attachment back onto the pins on the end of the new hard drive. Work alternately at each end so that the connector slides on evenly without bending the connector pins. 4. Insert the drive into the holder. 5. Reinstall the screws into the holder and drive case. Reference Guide 513 Add-On Devices To Prepare a New Hard Drive When you install a new hard drive, you also need to prepare it to be able to work with your notebook. If you want to restore the Windows software and operating system that were originally installed on your notebook, follow the system recovery procedures described in the Troubleshooting chapter of this guide. 514 Reference Guide 6 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Your Notebook This chapter contains solutions to many types of problems you might have with your notebook. Try the solutions one at a time, in the order in which they are presented. Here are some other sources of information for troubleshooting:

Use the Windows troubleshooters. Select Start > Help and Support. Select the question mark One-Touch key located at the top of the keyboard. See the Microsoft Windows manual shipped with the notebook. Refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet to contact a Customer Care Center for help and support. Reference Guide 61 Troubleshooting Audio Problems If No Sound is Audible If your model has a volume control, press the + (plus) button to increase the volume. Select the speaker icon on the taskbar (if present). Clear the Mute all check box if selected. If your model has an audio mute button, press it so the indicator light goes off. When you are operating your notebook in MS-DOS mode

(for example, when running MS-DOS games), you may find that the sound does not operate properly. Use Windows applications for full use of sound capabilities. If Sound Does Not Record Plug in an external microphone. The notebook does not have a built-in microphone. Check the software controls for recording sound. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Multimedia (or Entertainment) > Sound Recorder. In Volume Control, select Option > Properties, and make sure the microphone is enabled in the recording controls. If You Hear Loud, High-Pitched Feedback from the Speakers In the Volume Control, try reducing the Master volume by selecting the speaker icon in the taskbar. In Volume Control, select Options > Properties, then select the microphone option for the playback settings. Also in Volume Control, make sure the microphone is muted. 62 Reference Guide Troubleshooting CD-ROM and DVD Problems If You Cannot Boot from a CD or DVD Make sure the CD or DVD is bootable. Make sure the CD-ROM/DVD drive is selected as the boot device. See the Basic Operation chapter in this guide to change the boot sequence. Restart the notebook. Select Start > Turn Off Computer >

Restart. If a DVD Plays Erratically Dirt or smudges can cause a disc to skip. Clean the disc with a soft cloth. If the disc is badly scratched, it will probably have to be replaced. If you are playing the DVD on battery power, try changing the power scheme. If You Get a Region Code Error When Playing a DVD Movie DVDs can have regional codes embedded in the disc data. These codes prevent DVD movies from being played outside the region of the world in which they are sold. If you get a Region Code error, you are trying to play a DVD intended for a different region. If the Notebook Cannot Read a CD or DVD For a single-sided CD or DVD, make sure the disc is placed in the drive with the label facing up. Clean the disc. Wait 5 to 10 seconds after closing the tray to give the notebook time to recognize the disc. Reference Guide 63 Troubleshooting Restart the system: remove the disc from the drive, and select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. If you created the CD on a DVD/CD-RW combo-type drive, try using a different media brand. Read and write quality may vary for media. If a DVD Movie Does Not Fill the Screen Each side of a double-sided DVD has a different format (standard or widescreen). In widescreen format, black bands appear at the top and bottom of the screen. To view the standard format, flip the disc over and play the other side. If a DVD Does Not Play with Two Displays If you are using the Extended Desktop (dual displays), move the player window to the display selected as primary. If you are not using Extended Desktop and both displays are active, press the TV Now! One-Touch button at the top of the keyboard to switch to one display. If the Notebook Cannot Find Wordpad.exe After Inserting a CD The system is trying to open a .doc file in WordPad, but cannot find the Wordpad.exe program file. The system displays an error message asking for the path. In the dialog box, type C:\Program Files\Accessories. Display Problems If the Notebook Is On, But the Screen Is Blank Move the mouse or tap the TouchPad. This will wake the display if it is in Display-off mode. If the notebook is cold, allow it to warm up. 64 Reference Guide Troubleshooting If the Screen Is Difficult to Read Try setting the display resolution to its default setting of 1024 768 or higher, depending on your model. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display. Try adjusting the size of the desktop icons and labels. If an External Display Does Not Work Check the connections. The external monitor may not be detected. In the BIOS Setup utility, try setting Video Display Device to Both in the System Devices menu. If you are using a TV connected to the optional S-Video port, you must activate the TV. Hard Drive Problems If the Notebook Hard Drive Does Not Spin Make sure the notebook has power. If necessary, connect the AC adapter, and make sure it is fully plugged into a power source and into the back of the notebook. Remove and reinsert the hard drive. If the Hard Disk Makes a Buzzing or Whining Noise See whether the noise is coming from elsewhere, such as from the fan or a PC Card drive. Back up the drive immediately. Reference Guide 65 Troubleshooting If Files Are Corrupted Open My Computer, and the disk you want to scan. Select File > Properties. Select the Check Now box under the Error-checking section of the Tools tab. Run the virus-scanning program. If necessary, you can format the hard disk and reinstall the original factory software using the system recovery features described in the Troubleshooting chapter of this guide. Heat Problems Your notebook normally gets warm during routine operation. If the Notebook Gets Abnormally Hot Always set the notebook on a flat surface, so that air can flow freely around and underneath it. Make sure the air vents on the bottom and sides of the notebook are clear. Keep in mind that games and other programs that drive CPU usage toward 100 percent can increase the notebook temperature. Infrared Problems By default, the optional infrared port is enabled, so you must enable it before you can use it. If You Have Problems with Infrared Communications Make sure the line of sight between the 2 infrared ports is not blocked, and that the ports face each other as squarely as possible. (The notebook infrared port is located on the front of the notebook.) The ports should be no more than 1 meter apart. 66 Reference Guide Troubleshooting Check settings in the Device Manager:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. 2. On the Hardware tab, select Device Manager and expand the infrared devices. Select the infrared port and make sure that the device is enabled. Make sure only one application is using the infrared port. Keyboard and Pointing Device Problems Use these suggestions for built-in or external devices. If the Pointer Is Difficult to Control Adjust the pointer controls. Select Start > Control Panel >

Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. If the TouchPad Does Not Work Press the TouchPad on-off button to turn on the light. Do not touch the TouchPad while the notebook is rebooting or resuming from Standby mode. If this happens, try the following: press a key on the keyboard to restore normal operation. If an external mouse is connected, the built-in pointing devices are normally disabled. You can change this setting with the BIOS Setup utility. See Configuring Your Notebook in this chapter. Restart the notebook. Select Start > Turn Off Computer >

Restart. Reference Guide 67 Troubleshooting If the TouchPad Moves the Pointer or Cursor While You Type Press the TouchPad on-off button to turn off the TouchPad while you type. Local Area Network (LAN) Problems If the Built-In Network Adapter Does Not Connect to the LAN Check all cables and connections. Try connecting at a different network station, if available. Make sure the LAN cable is Category 3, 4, or 5 for 10Base-T operation, or Category 5 for 100Base-TX operation. Maximum cable length is 330 feet (100 meters). Select Start > Help and Support > and use the Networking troubleshooter. Open the hardware Device Manager. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. If the network interface is disabled, try to enable it. If it has a conflict, try disabling another device. If You Cannot Browse the Network Neighborhood or My Network Places Select Start > Search > Notebooks or People to look for a notebook. If You Cannot Log In to Netware Servers If a Netware server is using IPX/SPX protocol, you may need to force your frame type to match the server frame type. Check with your network administrator. 68 Reference Guide Troubleshooting If a Network Connection Responds Slowly If your network connection uses a proxy server, try enabling the option for bypassing the proxy server for local addresses. You can do this in Control Panel under your network connection properties. Memory Problems If a Message Reports You Are Out of Memory Make sure drive C is not running low on free space. If you are having memory problems while running MS-DOS programs, use the MS-DOS or Application and Software troubleshooter in Windows Help. Select Start > Help and Support. The full amount of RAM in your notebook is not available for running applications. A certain amount of RAM is used for display memory. The amount of display memory is shown in the BIOS Setup utility. If Memory Does Not Increase After Adding RAM Make sure your notebook is using only PC2100 DDR 266 MHz or higher memory (RAM) modules. If the Notebook Beeps But Does Not Start After Adding RAM You installed an incompatible type of RAM. Remove the module. Reference Guide 69 Troubleshooting Modem Problems If the Modem Seems Slow Excess static or noise on a line reduces the overall transmission speed of the modem connection. If necessary, contact your telephone company about fixing this type of problem. If you are dialing internationally, line noise is often a problem that is difficult or impossible to eliminate. If you have call-waiting, disable it. Your telephone company can provide instructions. Call-waiting can cause symptoms similar to static. Eliminate extra connections in the line. If possible, connect directly to the wall jack. Try another telephone line, preferably one normally used for a fax machine or modem. If the Modem Does Not Dial or No Dial Tone Is Detected Check all cables and connections. Connect a standard telephone to the phone line and make sure the line is working. Make sure someone else is not using the same phone line. Try another telephone line, preferably one normally used for a fax machine or modem. If you are in a foreign country, the dial tone may not be recognized by the modem. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Try disabling the option that waits for a dial tone. 610 Reference Guide Troubleshooting If the Modem Dials Incorrectly Check the telephone number you entered, including any digits required for outside access or long distance. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Check the dialing optionslook for duplicate digits for outside access or long distance. Make sure the number you are calling is not busy. If you are in a foreign country, the dial tone may not be recognized by the modem. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Try disabling the option that waits for a dial tone. If you have call-waiting, disable it. Your telephone company can provide instructions. If the Modem Dials, But Does Not Connect Make sure you are using an analog telephone line (2, 3, or 4 wires). You must not use a digital line. In a hotel, ask for a data line. Try another telephone line, preferably one normally used for a fax machine or modem. The modem at the other end may have a problem. Try dialing to a different modem. If the Modem Is Not Detected Check the modem setup. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Check the COM port. Open the hardware Device Manager. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. If the modem is disabled, try to enable it. If it has a conflict, try disabling another device. If you are running fax software using fax Class 2, try using Class 1. Reference Guide 611 Troubleshooting If the Modem Dials, But You Cannot Hear It If your model has an audio mute light, make sure it is turned off. If it is on, press the audio mute button. Check the speaker volume setting. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options, then select the modem and select Properties. Check the volume setting on the General tab. If the Modem Connects, But Transferred Data Is Bad In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options. Make sure the parity, speed, word length, and stop bits match on sending and receiving modems. Try a different phone line or dial a different server number. If the Modem Causes an ERROR Message A string of AT commands may contain an incorrect command. If you entered commands as extra settings for the modem in Control Panel or in your communications software, check the commands. If the Modem Does Not Fax If you are using fax Class 2 in the fax software, try using Class 1. Close any other communications programs. If you are faxing by printing from an application, make sure you have selected the fax printer. Try turning off power management features temporarily. If Excessive Line Current Is Detected Make sure you are using an analog telephone line (2, 3, or 4 wires). You must not use a digital line. In a hotel, ask for a data line. 612 Reference Guide Troubleshooting If the Modem Clicks Repeatedly, But Does Not Connect Make sure you are using an analog telephone line (2, 3, or 4 wires). You must not use a digital line. In a hotel, ask for a data line. Check all cables and connections. PC Card (PCMCIA) Problems If the Notebook Does Not Recognize a PC Card Remove and reinsert the PC Card. Restart the notebook. Select Start > Turn Off Computer >

Restart. Try the card in another notebook to see whether the card functions properly. Zoomed Video is not supported. If the card requires an IRQ, make sure one is available. Open the hardware Device Manager. Select Start > Control Panel >

Performance and Maintenance > System. If a Network PC Card Stops Communicating Properly The card may have been reset if the notebook entered Standby or shut off. Exit any applications, then remove and reinsert the card. Check settings in the Control Panel. Reference Guide 613 Troubleshooting If a PC Card Modem Is Not Working Disable the internal modem:

1. Open the hardware Device Manager. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. 2. Select Modem to list the current modem devices. 3. Select the internal modem, then select the option to disable the modem. Performance Problems If the Notebook Pauses or Runs Sluggishly This may be normal Windows behavior. Background processing can affect response time. Certain background operations (such as a virus-scanning program) can affect performance. Press ctrl+alt+del and use Task Manager to see if an application is not responding. Restart the notebook. Select Start > Turn Off Computer >

Restart. Some file browsers respond slowly while processing graphics or waiting for broken network connections to time out. If the notebook hard drive frequently runs (as indicated by the hard drive light on the front of the notebook) while the notebook appears to be paused or running slowly, Windows is likely spending excess time writing to its swap file on the notebook hard disk. If this occurs frequently, consider installing additional memory. Check the amount of available free disk space. Delete temporary and unneeded files. 614 Reference Guide Troubleshooting If the Notebook Stops Responding Press ctrl+alt+del and use Task Manager to end the application that is not responding. Press the power button for at least 4 seconds to turn off and reset the notebook. Unsaved data will be lost. Then press the power button again to turn the notebook back on. If nothing happens, insert the tip of a paper clip into the reset button on the bottom of the notebook. Then press the power button to turn the notebook back on. To avoid lockup problems, avoid pressing the TV Now!

One-Touch button to switch display devices while graphic-intensive applications are running. Also avoid turning the notebook off or putting it into Standby while such applications are running. Power and Battery Pack Problems If the Notebook Turns Off Immediately After It Turns On Battery power is probably extremely low. Plug in the AC adapter or insert a charged battery pack. If the Notebook Keeps Beeping The notebook beeps repeatedly or displays a warning when battery power is low. Save your work, shut down Windows immediately, and insert a charged battery pack or plug in the AC adapter. If the Battery Pack Does Not Charge Make sure the AC adapter is fully plugged into the power source and the notebook, and that the battery charging light on the notebook is on. Reference Guide 615 Troubleshooting If you are using a power strip, remove the AC adapter from the power strip and plug it directly into a wall outlet. Make sure the battery pack is fully installed and locked in place. Make sure you are using only the AC adapter included with your notebook (or other approved adapter that meets the power requirements of the notebook). Do not use a 60-watt, 3.16-amp adapter. Move the notebook away from any nearby heat source. Unplug the AC adapter and allow the battery pack to cool down. If the battery pack gets too hot, it will not charge properly. If available, try another battery pack and AC adapter. If the Notebook Has a Short Operating Time Conserve power using any of the suggestions listed in the Battery Packs and Power Management chapter in this guide. If you are running an application that has an automatic save feature (such as Microsoft Word), disable this feature or increase the specified save time to reduce hard disk access. If the operating time has gradually become shorter and the battery pack is more than a year or two old, you may need to replace the battery pack. Heavy modem use can impact battery-operating time. PC Card use can impact battery-operating time. Test and recondition the battery pack every 3 months. 616 Reference Guide Troubleshooting If the Time Remaining for the Battery Pack Is Not Correct The Time Remaining is an estimate, not a precise value, and is based on the rate at which the notebook is using power at the moment. This value therefore depends on your current task and assumes that you will continue using power at the same rate until the battery pack runs out. So, if you check the Time Remaining while the notebook is performing a task requiring a good deal of power (such as reading from a CD or DVD), the value will probably show less time remaining than you really have, since you will probably later switch to tasks that require less power. If the Notebook Does Not Enter Standby Mode as Expected If you have a connection to another computer, the notebook will not enter Standby if the connection is active. If the notebook is performing an operation, it normally waits for the operation to finish before going into Standby. If the Notebook Does Not Enter Hibernation as Expected Make sure Hibernation support is enabled. From Control Panel, open Power Options, then select the Hibernate tab. Check the Power Schemes tab. Make sure the Hibernation timeouts for both AC power and battery power are not set to Never. Reference Guide 617 Troubleshooting Printing Problems You will usually be able to solve most printing problems by using the Print troubleshooter in Windows Help. Select Start > Help and Support. If a Serial or Parallel Printer Does Not Print Make sure the printer is on and has paper in it. Make sure you are using the correct printer cable or cable adapter, and that the cable is secure at both ends. Check for printer errors. If the Left Edge of Printed Output Is Missing Certain applications may not work properly with 600-dpi printers. If you are using such a printer, try selecting a compatible printer driver for a 300-dpi printer. If an Infrared Printer Does Not Print Make sure the line of sight between the 2 infrared ports is not blocked, and that the ports face each other as squarely as possible. (The notebook infrared port is located on the front of the notebook.) The ports should be no more than 1 meter apart. Make sure the printer is on and has paper in it. Check for printer errors. Make sure Windows is running; otherwise, infrared printing is not available. 618 Reference Guide Troubleshooting Serial, Parallel and USB Problems If a Serial Mouse Does Not Work Make sure you followed the manufacturers installation instructions completely and have installed the mouse properly. If not, repeat the procedure. Make sure the port connection is secure. Restart the notebook. Select Start > Turn Off Computer >

Restart. Check mouse settings in Control Panel. Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. Use a mouse that connects to the USB port. Check the port settings in Control Panel. Open the hardware Device Manager, then select Ports (COM & LPT). If a Serial Modem Does Not Work Properly Make sure the port connection is secure. Use the Modem troubleshooter in Windows Help. Select Start > Help and Support. In Control Panel, open Phone and Modem Options, and check the modem settings. Disable the internal modem:

1. Open the hardware Device Manager. Select Start >

Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. 2. Select Modem to list the current modem devices. 3. Select the internal modem, then select the option to disable the modem. Check the port settings in Control Panel. Open the hardware Device Manager, then select Ports (COM & LPT). Reference Guide 619 Troubleshooting If the Serial or Parallel Port Is Not Working Make sure the port connection is secure. Check the port settings in Control Panel. Open the hardware Device Manager, then select Ports (COM & LPT). If the USB Port Is Not Working Contact the vendor of the peripheral device for the latest USB drivers. Check the port settings in Control Panel. Open the hardware Device Manager, then select Universal Serial Bus Controller. Startup Problems If the Notebook Does Not Respond When You Turn It On Connect the AC adapter. Reset the notebook by inserting the tip of a paper clip into the reset button on the bottom of the notebook. Then press the power button to turn it on. If the notebook still does not respond, remove the battery pack and AC adapter, remove any PC Cards, and undock the notebook if docked. Then plug in the AC adapter again, and reset the notebook using the reset button. If the Notebook Will Not Boot from Battery Power Make sure the battery pack is properly inserted and fully charged. Check the battery charge by removing it and pressing the pad on the side of the battery pack. The lights show the charge level. If available, try another battery pack. 620 Reference Guide Troubleshooting If the Notebook Will Not Boot from the Diskette Drive Make sure the diskette drive is selected as the boot device. See the Basic Operation chapter in this guide for directions. If you are using a USB diskette drive, use the BIOS Setup utility to make sure Legacy USB Support is enabled. If your notebook also has a built-in diskette drive, use the BIOS Setup utility Boot menu to make sure the USB diskette drive is the first device under Removable Drive. If the Notebook Stops Responding After Booting Check whether you are connected to a TCP/IP network with no DHCP server. This can cause a long delay at startup because DHCP is enabled. Contact your network administrator to determine the proper TCP/IP configuration. If the Notebook Takes a Long Time to Resume After Entering Standby The notebook can routinely take a minute or more to resume if it has a network card installed. While the operating system is loading drivers and checking hardware and network connections, you will see a blinking cursor on your display. As soon as the hardware has been reinitialized, the Windows desktop will appear. Wireless Problems If You Have Problems with Wireless 802.11 Communication Make sure the wireless indicator light is on. Make sure you are using the correct SSID and channel settings. Reference Guide 621 Troubleshooting Make sure you are in range of an access point (for an infrastructure connection) or other wireless notebook

(for an Ad Hoc connection). When you log on to an 802.11 network via an access point yet your notebook cannot connect to network resources, your notebook may not have been assigned an IP address. If the subnet mask for your wireless connection is 255.255.000.000, the network server did not assign an IP address to your notebook, and you may have to release and renew your network IP address. If releasing and renewing the IP address does not fix the problem, the access point may need to be rebooted. If you want to change the SSID to a different value to connect to a different access point, or if you want to change from Infrastructure mode to Ad Hoc mode, you may first have to release and renew the Internet IP address. See Local Area Network (LAN) Problems in this chapter. If You Have Trouble Connecting to Another Notebook in the Network Neighborhood or My Network Places Wait a few minutes, then press F5 to refresh the list of notebooks on the network. Select Start > Search > Notebooks or People to locate the notebook. If You Cannot Connect to a Particular Notebook on the Network Make sure the notebook is properly connected to the network. Make sure your TCP/IP setup is correct for your network. Select Start > Control Panel > Network Connections. 622 Reference Guide Troubleshooting If You Can Connect, But the Network Is Slow Check whether you might be in an area served by more than one wireless LAN. If so, the LANs could be interfering with each other. Move closer to the access point (for an infrastructure connection) or other wireless notebook (for an Ad Hoc connection). You could be too far away for high-speed communication. Configuring Your Notebook The BIOS Setup utility helps you configure your notebook operation. To Run the BIOS Setup Utility The BIOS (basic input and output system) Setup utility enables you to make changes to the notebook system configuration, and to tailor the operation of your notebook to your individual work needs. The settings made in BIOS Setup generally control the notebook hardware, and so greatly affect how the notebook operates. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. 2. When the logo screen appears, press F2 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. The pointing devices are not active in BIOS Setup, so you will need to use the keyboard to navigate:

Press the left and right arrow keys to move among menus. Press the up and down arrow keys to move among parameters in a menu. Press + or - to move through values for the current parameter, or press enter to change a setting. Reference Guide 623 Troubleshooting 4. After you select the options you want, press F10 or use the Exit menu to exit BIOS Setup. 5. If the settings cause a conflict between devices during reboot, the system prompts you to run BIOS Setup, and marks the conflicting settings. The following tables describe BIOS settings for the BIOS version at publication. If your BIOS is a different version, some settings may differ from those shown. Main Menu Setting Description BIOS Revision Shows the current BIOS version. Default Detected automatically System Time System Date Language Internal Hard Disk UMA Video Memory Memory Sets the time using 24-hour format. Values set take effect immediately. Sets the date using dd/mm/yy format (except English, which uses mm/dd/yy format). Sets the language for BIOS Setup. Sets the hard drive type and various parameters. Sets the video memory size allocated from total installed memory (RAM). Detected automatically Detected automatically Auto Shows the extended memory size. Detected automatically Serial Number Displays the serial number as shown on the back of the unit. Detected automatically 624 Reference Guide Troubleshooting Main Menu (Continued) Setting Service ID UUID MAC Address Description Default Displays an identifier used for repair service. Detected automatically Displays the value of the 16-byte UUID (Universally Unique ID) as 32 hex characters. Displays the MAC network address of the internal

(wired) LAN. Detected automatically Detected automatically System Devices Menu Setting Description Video Display Device Sets whether the built-in display automatically switches to an external display, if one is detected. Default Auto External Pointing Device Disables the internal pointing devices when an external pointing device is connected. Auto Legacy USB Support Wake On LAN from Power Off Enables BIOS support for USB mouse, keyboard, and diskette disk drive during startup. Lets the notebook be turned on via the LAN port. If this option is enabled, the notebook uses increased power while it is shut down. Enabled Disabled Reference Guide 625 Troubleshooting Security Menu Setting User Password is Description Shows if a user password is set. Administrator Password is Shows if an administrator password is set. Set User Password Set Administrator Password Require Password on Boot Internal hard drive lock Press enter to set, change, or clear the user password. The password can have no more than 8 characters (09, AZ), and cannot include special or accented characters. Press enter to set, change, or clear the administrator password, which protects BIOS Setup settings. The password can have no more than 8 characters (09, AZ), and cannot include special or accented characters. Sets whether a user password is required when the notebook boots. Requires the administrator password for changes. Only if the Boot password option is enabled, encodes the current user password (or administrator password if that is the only password set) on the hard drive. Default Clear Clear Enter Enter Disabled Disabled 626 Reference Guide Troubleshooting Description Default Shows the order of boot devices. Move the entries to change the order. If the notebook has more than 1 device in a + category, you can select the one scanned. Built-in LAN provides diskless boot from a network server. 1. Hard Drive 2. Removable devices 3. CD-ROM Drive 4. Built-in LAN Boot Menu Setting Hard Drive

+Removable Devices CD-ROM Drive Built-in LAN Exit Menu Setting Description Default Save Changes and Exit Saves Setup changes, then exits and reboots. Discard Changes and Exit Get Default Values Discards any Setup changes made since last save, then exits and reboots. Does not affect password, date, or time changes. Restores default settings, and remains in Setup. Does not affect password, date, or time changes. Reference Guide 627 Troubleshooting Updating Software and Drivers from the Web Software and driver updates for your notebook are available for download. For more information, visit the Web site at http://www.hp.com/support. Using System Recovery Features The notebook system recovery process provides several options for recovering optimal system functionality. System Restore and OS CDs (operating system CDs) enable you to recover or repair your notebook without losing personal data. The OS CD also enables reinstallation of the operating system software provided with the notebook. For best results, attempt to recover optimal notebook functionality by using the following procedures in the order described here. 628 Reference Guide Safeguarding Your Data Troubleshooting Software or devices added to the notebook can cause your system to become unstable. To safeguard your documents, store personal files in the My Documents folder and periodically create a backup copy of My Documents. Setting System Restore points is also recommended. Your notebook sets System Restore points (benchmarks) daily as you change your personal settings. The notebook may also set restore points when you add new software or devices. You should periodically set personal restore points when the notebook is functioning at optimal performance and before installing new software or devices. This enables you to return to a previous configuration restore point if you encounter problems. To set a system restore point:

1. Select Start > Help & Support. Select the task Use Tools to view your computer information and diagnose problems. Select System Restore. A System Restore window opens. 2. Follow the on-screen directions for setting a restore point. To restore the notebook to a previous date and time when it was functioning optimally:

1. Select Start > Help & Support > Tools > System Restore. 2. Follow the on-screen directions for restoring the notebook. Reference Guide 629 Troubleshooting Operating System (OS) CD Repair To repair the operating system without deleting your personal data, use the standard Microsoft OS CD that was shipped with the notebook. This CD contains the following preinstalled operating systems:

Microsoft Windows XP Home or Pro (depending on configuration) Appropriate service pack To repair the operating system:

1. Connect the notebook to external power and turn on the notebook. 2. Immediately insert the OS CD into the notebook. 3. Press and hold the power button for 5 seconds to turn off the notebook. 4. Press the power button again to start the notebook. 5. When prompted, press any key to boot from CD. After a few minutes, the Welcome to Setup screen is displayed. 6. Press enter to continue. A Licensing Agreement screen is displayed. 7. Press F8 to accept the agreement and continue. The Setup window opens. 8. Press R to repair the selected Windows installation. The repair process begins. This process takes 1 to 2 hours to complete. The notebook restarts in Windows after the process is complete. 630 Reference Guide Troubleshooting OS CD Reinstall If other recovery efforts do not successfully repair the notebook, you can reinstall the operating system. WARNING: Personal data and software you have installed on the notebook will be lost during the OS CD reinstall. To protect your data, make a backup copy of My Documents before reinstalling your operating system. Visit Help and Support to learn more about backing up your files. To reinstall the operating system:

1. Connect the notebook to external power and turn on the notebook. 2. Immediately insert the OS CD into the notebook. 3. Press and hold the power button for 5 seconds to turn off the notebook. 4. Press the power button again to start the notebook. 5. When prompted, press any key to boot from the CD. After a few minutes, the Welcome to Setup screen opens. 6. Press enter to continue. A Licensing Agreement screen is displayed. 7. Press F8 to accept the agreement and continue. The Setup window is displayed. 8. Press esc to continue installing a fresh copy of the operating system without repairing. 9. Press enter to set up the operating system. 10. Press C to continue setup using this partition. Reference Guide 631 Troubleshooting 11. Select Format the partition using the NTFS file system

(Quick) and press enter. A caution is displayed that formatting this drive will delete all current files. 12. Press F to format the drive. The reinstallation process begins. This process takes 1 to 2 hours to complete. The notebook restarts in Windows after the process is complete. When prompted for the product key, refer to the Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity located on the bottom of the notebook. Reinstalling Drivers After the OS installation process is complete, you must reinstall drivers. Use the Driver Recovery CD with the OS CD for hardware driver and system utility refresh and for full system software restoration. To reinstall drivers:

1. While running Windows, insert the Driver Recovery CD into the optical drive. 2. If you do not have Autorun enabled, select Start > Run. Then type D:\SWSETUP\APPINSTL\SETUP.EXE (where D indicates the optical drive). 3. Select the desired driver(s) or system utility from the Driver Recovery CD menu. 4. Select Next to complete the installation. Restoring Software Applications After the drivers are reinstalled, you must reinstall any software you added to the notebook. Use the Application Recovery and third-party CDs to reinstall or continue restoring software applications. Follow the installation instructions provided with the software CDs included with the notebook. 632 Reference Guide 1394 port connecting 57 location 13 A AC adapter connecting 18 jack location 13 adjusting brightness 26 monitor resolution 55 volume 26 ALT GR key 29 alternate graphics (ALT GR) 29 antivirus software 214 AT commands 44 audio adjusting volume 26 device connection 53 jack location 13 mute button 13 port locations 53 troubleshooting 62 volume control location 13 Index B back panel components 13 battery packs checking battery status 15, 33 creating power schemes 33 disposal and recycling 37 disposing of 37 extending life of 35 installing 17 location 12 low-battery warning 34 recharging 35 release latch 14 saving power automatically 32 saving power manually 33 status lights 15 troubleshooting 615 battery power check status 33 low-battery warning 34 battery status lights 33 BIOS Setup Utility 623 blackout periods, modem 43 bottom panel components 14 brightness, adjusting 26 Reference Guide Index1 Index buttons Click 12 One-Touch 12, 27 on-off (on TouchPad) 12 power 12, 110 reset 14 TV Now! One-Touch 55 wireless on-off 12 C cable lock slot 13 CardBus slot location 13 CD-ROM drive copying/creating CDs 212 inserting CD 210 location 12 removing CD 210 troubleshooting 63 changing the boot device 23 cleaning the notebook 217 Click buttons 12 components back panel 13 bottom panel 14 front panel 12 keyboard status lights 12 left panel 13 right panel 12 status lights 11 configuring modem 44 notebook 623 connecting 1394 device 57 AC power 18 audio device 53 external devices 51 local area network (LAN) 45 phone line 19 wireless network 46 connectors audio 13 RJ-11 (modem) 13 RJ-45 (network) 13 security 13 S-Video out 13 D decreasing display brightness 26 diskette drive location 13 display adjusting brightness 26 adjusting settings 55 extending the life 217 switching to external monitor 55 troubleshooting 64 using dual display mode 56 drivers reinstalling 632 DVD drive creating data disc 212 creating movie disc 212 inserting DVD 210 location 12 playing movies 211 removing DVD 210 setting region code 211 troubleshooting 63 Index2 Reference Guide E external monitor adjusting settings 55 port location 13 switching the display 55 F Fn keys 26 front panel components 12 function hot keys 26 H hard drive activity status light 15 holder replacement 513 location 12, 14 locking 215 preparing a new drive 514 protecting 215 replacing 512 troubleshooting 65 Hibernation mode 22 holder, hard drive 513 hot keys 26 I identifying components 11 increasing display brightness 26 infrared port connecting a device 57 location 12 transferring files 58 troubleshooting 66 using the port 58 inserting battery pack 17 Index CD 210 DVD 210 PC Card 51 RAM (memory) 59 K keyboard status lights 12, 16 troubleshooting 67 keys ALT GR 29 Applications 28 Fn (Function) 26 Windows 28 L LAN connection 45 troubleshooting 68 left panel components 13 locking the hard drive 215 low-battery warning 34 M maintenance and care 215, 216, 217 mini PCI cover 14 modem AT commands 44 blackout periods 43 settings 44 troubleshooting 610 monitor resolution 55 N network jack, location 13 Reference Guide Index3 Index O One-Touch buttons 12, 27 on-off button 12 open/close latch 12 Operating System CD reinstall 631 repair 630 P parallel connection, troubleshooting 620 parallel port (LPT1) 13 parts of the notebook back panel 13 bottom panel 14 front panel 12 left panel 13 right panel 12 status lights 15 password protection 213 PC Cards installing 51 removing 52 slot location 13 troubleshooting 613 ports 1394 13 external monitor 13 infrared 12 LPT1 (parallel) 13 serial port (COM1) 13 USB 13 power button 12, 110 manage consumption automatically 32 manage consumption manually 33 mode status light 15 settings 22 troubleshooting 615 power-saving modes 33 printing, troubleshooting 618 protecting data 216 hard drive 215 R RAM cover 14 installing 59 removing 510 troubleshooting 69 recharging the battery pack 35 reinstalling operating system 631 software 632 reinstalling software 628 removing CD 210 DVD 210 PC Cards 52 RAM (memory) 510 repairing the operating system 630 reset button location 14 using 23 restoring software 632 right panel components 12 Index4 Reference Guide RJ-11 (modem) jack connecting 19 location 13 RJ-45 (network) jack 13, 45 S safeguarding data 216, 629 saving power 33 scroll pad, location 12 security locking the hard drive 215 locking your notebook 213 protecting data 216 setting up a password 213 virus-protection software 214 serial port (COM1) location 13 troubleshooting 619 setting up the notebook connect phone line 19 connect power 18 install battery pack 17 power on 110 set up Windows 111 troubleshooting 620 settings, BIOS 624 setup utility 623 slot location cable lock 13 PC Card and CardBus 13 software, restoring 632 software, updating 628 Standby mode 22 status lights battery charge 15 hard drive 15 Index keyboard 12, 16 location 12 main 12, 15 meanings 15 wireless indicator 12 S-Video out jack location 13 using 54 switching the display, external monitor 55 system recovery 628 T telephone line connection 19 1394 port connecting 57 location 13 toggling built-in keypad 26 TouchPad 12, 24 functions 25 troubleshooting audio 62 battery packs 615 CD-ROM drive 63 display 64 DVD drive 63 hard drive 65 heat 66 infrared 66 keyboard 67 LAN 68 modem 610 parallel 620 PC Cards 613 power 615 printing 618 Reference Guide Index5 Index RAM (memory) 69 serial 619 startup 620 USB 620 wireless 621 turning off notebook 22 wireless network connection 48 turning on notebook 110, 22 wireless network connection 47 TV Now! One-Touch button 55 U updating software 628 USB ports location 13 troubleshooting 620 using BIOS Setup Utility 623 V virus-protection software 214 volume control 13 W wireless indicator light 12 network connection 46 on-off button 12 troubleshooting 621 wireless network connection turning off 48 turning on 47 Index6 Reference Guide

HP_SU_370699-001.book Page i Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Startup Guide HP Notebook Series Document Part Number: 370699-001 June 2004 This guide explains how to set up your notebook and begin using it. It also provides battery pack, power management, and troubleshooting information. HP_SU_370699-001.book Page ii Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Copyright 2004 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Startup Guide HP Notebook Series First Edition June 2004 Reference Number: ze4900/nx9020/nx9030/nx9040 Document Part Number: 370699-001 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page iii Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Contents 1 Getting Started with Your Notebook Important Safety Information. 11 Identifying Parts of the Notebook . 12 Front Panel and Right Panel Components . 13 Left Panel and Back Panel Components . 14 Bottom Panel Components . 15 Status Lights . 16 Setting Up Your Notebook. 18 Step 1: Insert the Battery Pack . 18 Step 2: Connect AC Power . 19 Step 3: Connect a Phone Line . 110 Step 4: Turn On the Notebook. 111 Step 5: Set Up Windows . 112 Using the Documentation CD . 112 2 Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook . 21 Default Power Settings . 22 To Reset the Notebook . 23 To Change the Boot Device. 23 To Use the TouchPad . 24 To Use the Tap to Click Function of the TouchPad . 25 To Use the Function Hot Keys . 26 Using CDs or DVDs. 27 To Play DVD Movies . 27 Startup Guide iii HP_SU_370699-001.book Page iv Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Contents To Write to DVD Media (Select Models Only) . 27 To Connect a TV to Your Notebook

(Select Models Only). 28 To Connect an Infrared Device (Select Models Only) . 28 3 Battery Packs and Power Management Using Battery Power . 31 To Check Battery Status . 31 To Respond to a Low-Battery Warning . 32 To Recharge the Battery Pack . 33 To Get the Most from Your Battery Packs . 33 Disposing of a Used Battery Pack . 35 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Your Notebook . 41 Display Problems. 42 Hard Drive Problems . 43 Keyboard and Pointing Device Problems . 43 Power and Battery Pack Problems. 45 Startup Problems . 46 Configuring Your Notebook . 47 To Run the BIOS Setup Utility . 47 Updating Software and Drivers from the Web . 48 Using System Recovery Features. 48 Safeguarding Your Data . 49 Operating System (OS) CD Repair . 410 OS CD Reinstall . 411 Reinstalling Drivers. 412 Restoring Software Applications. 412 Index iv Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 1 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM 1 Getting Started with Your Notebook Important Safety Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. For more information, refer to the Regulatory and Safety Notices on the Documentation CD provided with your product. WARNING: To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to your equipment:

Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the product by unplugging the power cord from the electrical outlet. If provided with a three-conductor power cord having a three-pin attachment plug, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety &

Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the hard drive or on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. Startup Guide 11 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 2 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Getting Started with Your Notebook CAUTION: To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunications line cord to connect a modem to the telephone wall jack. In Australia, the notebook must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008. When using your notebook with a telephone connection, always follow basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, and injury to persons. Do not use this product with a telephone connection near water (for example, near a bathtub, sink, swimming pool, or in a wet basement). Avoid using a telephone connection (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning. Do not use a telephone connection to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak. Use only the power cord and battery packs indicated in this guide. Do not dispose of battery packs in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions. Disconnect the modem cable before opening the notebook case or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. Do not plug a modem cable or telephone cable into the network (LAN) receptacle. Identifying Parts of the Notebook Components included with the notebook may vary by geographical region and the features you selected. The following tables identify the standard external components included with most notebook models. Find the illustrations that closely match your notebook to identify your components. 12 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 3 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Getting Started with Your Notebook Front Panel and Right Panel Components 1 Main status lights (left to right):

power mode, hard drive activity, and battery 2 TouchPad, scroll pad, Click buttons, and an on-off button 3 Power button: turns the notebook on and off 7 CD-ROM, DVD, or other drive 8 Battery pack 9 Wireless on-off button and indicator light (select models only) 4 Keyboard status lights

- Infrared port (select models only) 5 One-Touch buttons q Hard drive 6 Notebook open/close latch Startup Guide 13 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 4 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Getting Started with Your Notebook Left Panel and Back Panel Components 1 AC adapter jack 2 Universal serial bus (USB) ports 9 RJ-11 jack: connects the modem cable

- PC Card and CardBus slot and button (select models only;

location varies by model) 3 RJ-45 jack: connects a network cable q IEEE 1394 port

(select models only) 4 S-Video out jack

(select models only) 5 Parallel port (LPT1): use this port for a parallel printer or other parallel device (select models only) 6 Serial port (COM1): use this port for a serial mouse, modem, printer, or other serial device

(select models only) 7 External monitor port 8 Cable lock slot (security connector) w Audio jacks (left to right):

external microphone, audio out

(headphones) e Volume control r Audio mute button and audio mute light t Diskette drive

(select models only) 14 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 5 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Getting Started with Your Notebook Bottom Panel Components 1 Hard drive 2 Battery latch 3 RAM (memory) cover 4 Reset button 5 Mini PCI cover

(no user parts inside) CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a Mini PCI device authorized for use in your notebook by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore notebook functionality. Then contact Customer Care. Startup Guide 15 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 6 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Getting Started with Your Notebook Status Lights The notebook includes a number of status lights that report power and battery status, drive activity, and keyboard functions such as Caps Lock and Num Lock. The following diagram shows the main status lights on the front of the notebook. 1 Power mode Onnotebook is on (even if the display is off) Blinkingnotebook is in Standby Offnotebook is off or in Hibernation 2 Hard drive activity Onnotebook is accessing the hard drive 3 Battery status GreenAC adapter is connected and the battery pack is fully charged AmberAC adapter is connected and the battery pack is charging BlinkingAC adapter is connected and the battery pack is missing or has a fault OffAC adapter is not connected 16 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 7 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Getting Started with Your Notebook The keyboard status lights, located above the keyboard, indicate the states of the keyboard locks. 1 Caps Lock On: Caps Lock is active. 2 Num Lock On: Num Lock is active. (The Keypad Lock must also be on to use the embedded keypad.) 3 Keypad Lock On: The embedded keypad is active (Fn+F8). Num Lock must also be on for the numeric keys. Otherwise, cursor control is active (as marked on an external keyboard). Startup Guide 17 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 8 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Getting Started with Your Notebook Setting Up Your Notebook WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety &

Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the hard drive or on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. When you set up your notebook for the first time, you will connect the AC adapter, charge the battery pack, turn on the notebook, and run the Microsoft Windows Setup program. Step 1: Insert the Battery Pack WARNING: Do not mutilate or puncture battery packs. Do not dispose of battery packs in fire, or they can burst or explode, releasing hazardous chemicals. Rechargeable battery packs must be recycled or disposed of properly. To install the battery pack:

1. Turn the notebook upside down. 2. Insert the connector end of the battery pack into the battery pack compartment, then slide the battery pack in until it latches. 18 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 9 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Getting Started with Your Notebook Step 2: Connect AC Power CAUTION: Use only the AC adapter included with your notebook (or other approved adapter that meets the power requirements of the notebook). Using the wrong AC adapter could damage the notebook or adapter, cause data loss, and may void your warranty. 1. Plug the AC adapter into the notebook. 2. Connect the power cord to the AC adapter. 3. Plug the power cord into a wall outlet. The notebook battery starts charging. When unplugging the power cord, unplug it from the outlet before unplugging it from the AC adapter. While the battery pack is charging, you can continue with the section Step 3: Connect a Phone Line. Startup Guide 19 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 10 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Getting Started with Your Notebook Step 3: Connect a Phone Line 1. Make sure the telephone line is an analog line, sometimes called a data line. (Do not use a digital line.) 2. Connect the telephone cord (RJ-11) into a telephone jack. 3. Plug the other end of the telephone cord into the RJ-11 modem jack on the notebook. For details about using the modem, including AT commands, see the Documentation CD included with your notebook. 110 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 11 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Getting Started with Your Notebook Step 4: Turn On the Notebook Press the power button above the left side of the keyboard. The notebook boots up, and Windows starts automatically. If your notebook does not turn on when operating on battery power, the battery pack may be out of power. Plug in the AC adapter, then press the power button again. Leave the AC adapter plugged in for several hours to fully charge the battery pack. Charge times will vary. WARNING: This notebook is designed to run demanding applications at full power. As a result of increased power consumption, it is normal for the notebook to feel warm or hot when used continuously. To avoid potential discomfort or burns, do not block the air vents or use the notebook on your lap for extended periods. The notebook complies with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment

(IEC 60950). Startup Guide 111 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 12 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Getting Started with Your Notebook Step 5: Set Up Windows Your notebook has the Microsoft Windows operating system preinstalled on its hard drive. The first time you turn on your notebook, the Windows Setup program runs automatically and includes opportunities to customize your setup. 1. Follow the Setup program instructions on the screen. If the program prompts you to enter the Product ID code, locate the code on the bottom of the notebook. 2. Check the modem country or region settings. Select Start >

Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Phone and Modem Options, then choose your country/region. Using the Documentation CD Information about using the notebook can be found on the Documentation CD included with the notebook. To view a guide:

1. Insert the Documentation CD into a CD or DVD drive. If autorun is enabled, the reference library menu is displayed on the screen (this may take a few seconds). 2. Select the guide you want to read from the reference library menu. 3. If prompted, accept the Adobe Acrobat Reader license agreement or install Acrobat Reader by following the instructions on the screen. 112 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 1 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM 2 Basic Operation Operating Your Notebook You can start and stop your notebook by using the power button. At other times, power considerations, types of active connections, and startup time may cause you to use alternative methods to start or stop your notebook. This chapter describes several methods. Startup Guide 21 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 2 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Basic Operation Default Power Settings Power mode To enter this mode Function ONPower status light will turn on. Briefly press the power button. OFFPower status light will turn off. StandbyPower status light will blink. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Turn Off. If the system has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds to turn off the notebook. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Stand By.

-or-

Allow the system to time out. Powers on the notebook. Powers off the notebook. Saves significant power. Turns off the display and other components. Maintains current session in RAM. Restarts quickly. Restores network connections. HibernationPower status light will turn off. If the notebook is already on, briefly press the power button.

-or-

Press Fn+F12.

-or-

Allow the system to time out. Saves maximum power. Saves current session to disk, then shuts down. Restores network connections. You can also customize how these power modes work. See the Battery Packs and Power Management chapter in the Reference Guide on the Documentation CD included with your notebook. 22 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 3 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Basic Operation To Reset the Notebook Occasionally, you may find that Windows or the notebook has stopped responding and will not let you turn off the notebook. If this happens, try the following procedures in this order:

If possible, shut down Windows. Press ctrl+alt+del, then select Shut Down > Restart.

-or-

Press the power button for at least 4 seconds until the display shuts down. Unsaved data will be lost. Press the power button again to restart.

-or-

Insert the tip of a paper clip into the reset button on the bottom of the notebook, then press the power button to restart. To Change the Boot Device The notebook normally boots from its internal hard drive. You can also boot the notebook from a diskette drive, a CD-ROM drive, or an internal network interface card. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. 2. When the logo screen appears, press esc to display the Boot menu. 3. Use the arrow keys to select the boot device, then press enter. If you want to boot from a specific device whenever it is present, change the boot order using the BIOS Setup utility. See Configuring Your Notebook in the Troubleshooting chapter in this guide. Startup Guide 23 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 4 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Basic Operation To Use the TouchPad The TouchPad includes an on-off button so you can turn off the TouchPad to avoid moving the pointer accidentally when you are typing. The indicator light turns off when you turn off the TouchPad. 1 Click buttons. The Click buttons work like the left and right buttons on a standard mouse 2 TouchPad (touch-sensitive pointing device). 3 TouchPad on-off button and indicator light. 4 Scroll pad. The scroll pad scrolls vertically to display the contents of the active window. 24 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 5 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Basic Operation To Use the Tap to Click Function of the TouchPad The Tap to Click function of your TouchPad is enabled by default. To disable it, follow the instructions included here:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware >

Mouse. The Mouse Properties dialog box opens. 2. Select the Tapping tab. 3. In the left panel, clear the Tapping check box. 4. Select Apply > OK. The Tap to Click function is now disabled. Startup Guide 25 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 6 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Basic Operation To Use the Function Hot Keys Fn The combination of the Fn key plus another key creates a hot keya shortcut key sequencefor various system controls. To use a hot key, press and hold Fn, press the appropriate second key, then release both keys. This hot key Does this Fn+F1 Fn+F2 Fn+F5 Fn+F8 Fn+F12 Fn+NumLock Fn+Page Up Fn+Page Down Fn+Backspace Decreases the display brightness. Increases the display brightness. Toggles the external monitor on and off. Toggles the built-in keypad on and off. Does not affect an external keyboard. If Num Lock is on, then the numeric functions are active;

otherwise, cursor control is active (as marked on an external keyboard). Initiates Hibernation. Toggles Scroll Lock on and off. Increases the audio volume and cancels the mute setting. Decreases the audio volume. Mutes/unmutes the audio output. 26 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 7 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Basic Operation Using CDs or DVDs To Play DVD Movies If your notebook is equipped with a DVD or other DVD readable drive, it also includes DVD player software that lets you play DVD movies. DVDs can have regional codes embedded in the disc data. These codes prevent DVD movies from being played outside the region of the world in which they are sold. If you get a region code error, you are trying to play a DVD intended for a different region. Most DVD drives let you change the region code only a limited number of times (usually no more than 4). When you reach this limit, your last change to the region code will be hard-coded on the DVD drive and will be permanent. Your warranty does not cover the expense of correcting this situation. Refer to the Help for your DVD player software for details about setting region codes. To Write to DVD Media (Select Models Only) If your notebook is equipped with a DVD+RW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive, you must install your DVD burning software from the CDs included with your notebook before you can write to DVD media. When writing to DVD+R or DVD+RW media, observe the following guidelines:

Place the notebook on a flat, stable surface. Ensure that the AC adapter is connected to the notebook and an AC electrical outlet. Close and exit all other software applications, except the CD burning software (when writing a data disc) or DVD burning software (when writing a video disc). Startup Guide 27 Basic Operation.fm Page 8 Thursday, May 27, 2004 12:34 PM Basic Operation To Connect a TV to Your Notebook

(Select Models Only) You can use a TV as an external monitor for your notebook. To connect a TV to your notebook:

1. Plug a standard 4-pin S-Video cable to the S-Video out jack on your notebook (yellow connector on the back panel). Plug the other end of the cable to the S-Video in jack on your television. Although your notebook has a 7-pin S-Video out jack, the notebook accepts either a 7-pin or 4-pin cable connection. 2. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes >

Display. Then, select Settings tab > Advanced button >

Display tab. 3. To enable the TV, select the red button next to TV. If the S-Video cable is not plugged into your notebook and TV, the red button will not be displayed. 4. Select Apply to accept the changes. 5. If you are prompted to restart Windows, select Yes. To Connect an Infrared Device

(Select Models Only) Select models include an infrared port. By default, the infrared port is enabled, so you must first enable it before you can use it. If your model has an infrared port (a small, rectangular lens located on the front of the notebook), then your notebook can communicate wirelessly with other infrared devices, such as printers or other notebooks, using this port. 28 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 9 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Basic Operation Using the Infrared Port Make sure the infrared port of your notebook and the infrared port of the device with which you want to communicate lie in a straight line facing each other. The 2 ports should be no more than 3 feet (1 meter) apart with no obstructions in between. Noise from nearby equipment can cause transmission errors. 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > System. 2. Select the Hardware tab > Device Manager button > ALI fast infrared controller > Enable Device button. 3. Select Next > Finish > Close. Then close all open dialog boxes. To check the status of communications, open Wireless Link by selecting Start > Control Panel > Printers & Other Hardware > Wireless Link. Printing to an Infrared Printer Install your printer and assign it to the notebook infrared port. You can then print from your applications or by following the directions for infrared ports. Transferring Files Through an Infrared Connection You can use your notebook infrared port to transfer files by using Wireless Link. See the Windows online Help for instructions on using Wireless Link. Startup Guide 29 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 10 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Basic Operation 210 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 1 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM 3 Battery Packs and Power Management Using Battery Power For information about how your notebook regulates power consumption and how you can manually reduce power consumption and extend the life of the notebook battery, see the Battery Packs and Power Management chapter in the Reference Guide on the Documentation CD included with your notebook. To Check Battery Status From the battery status light Check the battery status light on the notebook. From the Windows taskbar The Windows taskbar can display a power icon that provides detailed battery status information (see Windows Help for details). The icon resembles a battery when a battery pack is the notebooks sole source of power. Place the pointer over the power icon to display the remaining battery charge. This value is shown as either a percentage of charge remaining or as time remaining. Select the power icon to open the Battery Meter window. Startup Guide 31 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 2 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Battery Packs and Power Management From the Windows Control Panel Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options, then select the Power Meter tab to see the battery status. The Alarms and Advanced tabs provide additional power information options. On the battery pack 1. Remove the battery pack from the notebook. See the Getting Started with Your Notebook chapter in this guide. 2. Press the contact pad on the side of the battery pack. The number of lights that turn on indicates the remaining charge

(each light represents 20 percent of a full charge). To Respond to a Low-Battery Warning The notebook automatically alerts you when the battery power drops to a critically low level. The notebook first emits a high-pitched beep or displays a warning message. Then, if you do not restore power within a short time, the notebook goes into Hibernation. After the notebook enters Hibernation in this way, you will not be able to turn it on again until you restore power by doing one of the following procedures:

Replace the battery pack with a charged one. Plug in the AC adapter. If you plug in the AC adapter, you can continue to work while your battery pack recharges. 32 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 3 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Battery Packs and Power Management To Recharge the Battery Pack CAUTION: The AC adapter is normally warm when plugged into an AC outlet. The notebook is normally warm while recharging. Do not recharge the notebook in a briefcase or other confined space, or the battery pack could overheat. Plug the AC adapter into the notebook. Charging can take several hours. If you continue working while the battery pack charges, the charging time may increase. The operating time for a fully charged battery pack depends on the notebook model, power management settings, and level of use. To Get the Most from Your Battery Packs Follow these suggestions to make your battery power last as long as possible:

Plug in the AC adapter, especially when using a CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive, or any external connections such as a PC Card or a modem. Set the display brightness to the lowest comfortable level

(Fn+F1). Put the notebook in Standby when you will not be using it for a short while. Put the notebook in Hibernation whenever you want to save your current session but will not be using the notebook for a day or more. Set the automatic timeout settings to emphasize saving power. If your notebook has a multispeed processor, use the lower speed on battery power (the default settings conserve battery power). Startup Guide 33 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 4 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Battery Packs and Power Management If your notebook has a wireless on-off button, turn off the wireless function when you are not using it. Press the wireless on-off button to turn off the light. If you have a PC Card, such as a network card, remove it when you are not using it. Some PC Cards use significant power even while they are inactive. If you work with an application that uses the serial port or a PC Card, exit the application when you finish using it. In addition, follow these suggestions to extend the life of your battery packs:

Do not leave battery packs unused for long periods. If you have more than one, rotate them. Unplug the AC adapter when the notebook is not in use. If the notebook will be unused and unplugged for more than 2 weeks, remove and store the battery pack. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the battery pack, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. High temperatures accelerate the self-discharge rate of a stored battery pack. To prolong the charge of a stored battery pack, place it in a cool, dry location. To maintain the accuracy of battery charge displays, calibrate a battery pack that has been stored for one month or more before using it. Avoid using or charging battery packs at high temperatures. 34 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 5 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Battery Packs and Power Management Disposing of a Used Battery Pack WARNING: There is a risk of fire and chemical burn if a battery pack is handled improperly. Do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery pack or short the contacts on a battery pack. Do not expose a battery pack to temperatures higher than 60C (140F) or dispose of a battery pack in water or fire. When a battery pack has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of it in general household waste. In Europe, dispose of or recycle battery packs by using the public collection system or by returning them to HP, your service partner, or their agents. In other regions, refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet, included with the notebook, to contact HP and request information about battery pack disposal. For more information about battery pack precautions and disposal and the complete text of governmental agency notices, refer to the Regulatory and Safety Notices guide on the Documentation CD. Startup Guide 35 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 6 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Battery Packs and Power Management 36 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 1 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM 4 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Your Notebook This chapter contains solutions to many types of problems you might have with your notebook. Try the solutions one at a time, in the order in which they are presented. Here are some other sources of information for troubleshooting:

For a more complete list of troubleshooting suggestions, see the Troubleshooting chapter in the Reference Guide on the Documentation CD included with your notebook. Use the Windows troubleshooters. Select Start > Help and Support. Select the question mark One-Touch key located at the top of the keyboard. See the Microsoft Windows manual shipped with the notebook. Refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet to contact a Customer Care Center for help and support. Startup Guide 41 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 2 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Troubleshooting Display Problems If the Notebook Is On, But the Screen Is Blank Move the mouse or tap the TouchPad. This will wake the display if it is in Display-off mode. If the notebook is cold, allow it to warm up. If the Screen Is Difficult to Read Try setting the display resolution to its default setting of 1024 768 or higher, depending on your model. Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Themes > Display. Try adjusting the size of the desktop icons and labels. If an External Display Does Not Work Check the connections. The external monitor may not be detected. In the BIOS Setup utility, try setting Video Display Device to Both in the System Devices menu. If you are using a TV connected to the optional S-Video port, you must activate the TV. 42 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 3 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Troubleshooting Hard Drive Problems If the Notebook Hard Drive Does Not Spin Make sure the notebook has power. If necessary, connect the AC adapter, and make sure it is fully plugged into a power source and into the back of the notebook. Remove and reinsert the hard drive. If Files Are Corrupted Open My Computer, and the disk you want to scan. Select File > Properties. Select the Check Now box under the Error-checking section of the Tools tab. Run the virus-scanning program. If necessary, you can format the hard disk and reinstall the original factory software using the system recovery features described in the Troubleshooting chapter of the Reference Guide. Keyboard and Pointing Device Problems Use these suggestions for built-in or external devices. If the Pointer Is Difficult to Control Adjust the pointer controls. Select Start > Control Panel >

Printers and Other Hardware > Mouse. Startup Guide 43 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 4 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Troubleshooting If the TouchPad Does Not Work Press the TouchPad on-off button to turn on the light. Do not touch the TouchPad while the notebook is rebooting or resuming from Standby mode. If this happens, try the following: press a key on the keyboard to restore normal operation. If an external mouse is connected, the built-in pointing devices are normally disabled. You can change this setting with the BIOS Setup utility. See Configuring Your Notebook in this chapter. Restart the notebook. Select Start > Turn Off Computer >

Restart. If the Notebook Stops Responding Press ctrl+alt+del and use Task Manager to end the application that is not responding. Press the power button for at least 4 seconds to turn off and reset the notebook. Unsaved data will be lost. Then press the power button again to turn the notebook back on. If nothing happens, insert the tip of a paper clip into the reset button on the bottom of the notebook. Then press the power button to turn the notebook back on. To avoid lockup problems, avoid pressing the TV Now!

One-Touch button to switch display devices while graphic-intensive applications are running. Also avoid turning the notebook off or putting it into Standby while such applications are running. 44 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 5 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Troubleshooting Power and Battery Pack Problems If the Notebook Turns Off Immediately After It Turns On Battery power is probably extremely low. Plug in the AC adapter or insert a charged battery pack. If the Notebook Keeps Beeping The notebook beeps repeatedly or displays a warning when battery power is low. Save your work, shut down Windows immediately, and insert a charged battery pack or plug in the AC adapter. If the Battery Pack Does Not Charge Make sure the AC adapter is fully plugged into the power source and the notebook, and that the battery charging light on the notebook is on. If you are using a power strip, remove the AC adapter from the power strip and plug it directly into a wall outlet. Make sure the battery pack is fully installed and locked in place. Make sure you are using only the AC adapter included with your notebook (or other approved adapter that meets the power requirements of the notebook). Do not use a 60-watt, 3.16-amp adapter. Move the notebook away from any nearby heat source. Unplug the AC adapter and allow the battery pack to cool down. If the battery pack gets too hot, it will not charge properly. If available, try another battery pack and AC adapter. Startup Guide 45 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 6 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Troubleshooting Startup Problems If the Notebook Does Not Respond When You Turn It On Connect the AC adapter. Reset the notebook by inserting the tip of a paper clip into the reset button on the bottom of the notebook. Then press the power button to turn it on. If the notebook still does not respond, remove the battery pack and AC adapter, remove any PC Cards, and undock the notebook if docked. Then plug in the AC adapter again, and reset the notebook using the reset button. If the Notebook Will Not Boot from Battery Power Make sure the battery pack is properly inserted and fully charged. Check the battery charge by removing it and pressing the pad on the side of the battery pack. The lights show the charge level. If available, try another battery pack. 46 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 7 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Troubleshooting Configuring Your Notebook The BIOS Setup utility helps you configure your notebook operation. To Run the BIOS Setup Utility The BIOS (basic input and output system) Setup utility enables you to make changes to the notebook system configuration, and to tailor the operation of your notebook to your individual work needs. The settings made in BIOS Setup generally control the notebook hardware, and so greatly affect how the notebook operates. 1. Select Start > Turn Off Computer > Restart. 2. When the logo screen appears, press F2 to enter BIOS Setup. 3. The pointing devices are not active in BIOS Setup, so you will need to use the keyboard to navigate:

Press the left and right arrow keys to move among menus. Press the up and down arrow keys to move among parameters in a menu. Press + or - to move through values for the current parameter, or press enter to change a setting. 4. After you select the options you want, press F10 or use the Exit menu to exit BIOS Setup. 5. If the settings cause a conflict between devices during reboot, the system prompts you to run BIOS Setup, and marks the conflicting settings. Startup Guide 47 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 8 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Troubleshooting Updating Software and Drivers from the Web Software and driver updates for your notebook are available for download. For more information, visit the Web site at http://www.hp.com/support. Using System Recovery Features The notebook system recovery process provides several options for recovering optimal system functionality. System Restore and OS CDs (operating system CDs) enable you to recover or repair your notebook without losing personal data. The OS CD also enables reinstallation of the operating system software provided with the notebook. For detailed information, see the Troubleshooting chapter in the Reference Guide. 48 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 9 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Safeguarding Your Data Troubleshooting Software or devices added to the notebook can cause your system to become unstable. To safeguard your documents, store personal files in the My Documents folder and periodically create a backup copy of My Documents. Setting System Restore points is also recommended. Your notebook sets System Restore points (benchmarks) daily as you change your personal settings. The notebook may also set restore points when you add new software or devices. You should periodically set personal restore points when the notebook is functioning at optimal performance and before installing new software or devices. This enables you to return to a previous configuration restore point if you encounter problems. To set a system restore point:

1. Select Start > Help & Support. Select the task Use Tools to view your computer information and diagnose problems. Select System Restore. A System Restore window opens. 2. Follow the on-screen directions for setting a restore point. To restore the notebook to a previous date and time when it was functioning optimally:

1. Select Start > Help & Support > Tools > System Restore. 2. Follow the on-screen directions for restoring the notebook. Startup Guide 49 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 10 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Troubleshooting Operating System (OS) CD Repair To repair the operating system without deleting your personal data, use the standard Microsoft OS CD that was shipped with the notebook. This CD contains the following preinstalled operating systems:

Microsoft Windows XP Home or Pro (depending on configuration) Appropriate service pack To repair the operating system:

1. Connect the notebook to external power and turn on the notebook. 2. Immediately insert the OS CD into the notebook. 3. Press and hold the power button for 5 seconds to turn off the notebook. 4. Press the power button again to start the notebook. 5. When prompted, press any key to boot from CD. After a few minutes, the Welcome to Setup screen is displayed. 6. Press enter to continue. A Licensing Agreement screen is displayed. 7. Press F8 to accept the agreement and continue. The Setup window opens. 8. Press R to repair the selected Windows installation. The repair process begins. This process takes 1 to 2 hours to complete. The notebook restarts in Windows after the process is complete. 410 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 11 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Troubleshooting OS CD Reinstall If other recovery efforts do not successfully repair the notebook, you can reinstall the operating system. WARNING: Personal data and software you have installed on the notebook will be lost during the OS CD reinstall. To protect your data, make a backup copy of My Documents before reinstalling your operating system. Visit Help and Support to learn more about backing up your files. To reinstall the operating system:

1. Connect the notebook to external power and turn on the notebook. 2. Immediately insert the OS CD into the notebook. 3. Press and hold the power button for 5 seconds to turn off the notebook. 4. Press the power button again to start the notebook. 5. When prompted, press any key to boot from the CD. After a few minutes, the Welcome to Setup screen opens. 6. Press enter to continue. A Licensing Agreement screen is displayed. 7. Press F8 to accept the agreement and continue. The Setup window is displayed. 8. Press esc to continue installing a fresh copy of the operating system without repairing. 9. Press enter to set up the operating system. 10. Press C to continue setup using this partition. Startup Guide 411 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 12 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Troubleshooting 11. Select Format the partition using the NTFS file system

(Quick) and press enter. A caution is displayed that formatting this drive will delete all current files. 12. Press F to format the drive. The reinstallation process begins. This process takes 1 to 2 hours to complete. The notebook restarts in Windows after the process is complete. When prompted for the product key, refer to the Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity located on the bottom of the notebook. Reinstalling Drivers After the OS installation process is complete, you must reinstall drivers. Use the Driver Recovery CD with the OS CD for hardware driver and system utility refresh and for full system software restoration. To reinstall drivers:

1. While running Windows, insert the Driver Recovery CD into the optical drive. 2. If you do not have Autorun enabled, select Start > Run. Then type D:\SWSETUP\APPINSTL\SETUP.EXE (where D indicates the optical drive). 3. Select the desired driver(s) or system utility from the Driver Recovery CD menu. 4. Select Next to complete the installation. Restoring Software Applications After the drivers are reinstalled, you must reinstall any software you added to the notebook. Use the Application Recovery and third-party CDs to reinstall or continue restoring software applications. Follow the installation instructions provided with the software CDs included with the notebook. 412 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 1 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Index status lights 16 troubleshooting 45 battery power check status 31 low-battery warning 32 battery status lights 31 BIOS Setup Utility 47 bottom panel components 15 brightness, adjusting 26 buttons Click 13 One-Touch 13 on-off (on TouchPad) 13 power 13, 111 reset 15 wireless on-off 13 C cable lock slot 14 CD-ROM drive location 13 changing the boot device 23 Click buttons 13 components back panel 14 bottom panel 15 front panel 13 keyboard status lights 13 left panel 14 1394 port location 14 A AC adapter connecting 19 jack location 14 Acrobat Reader 112 adjusting brightness 26 volume 26 audio adjusting volume 26 jack location 14 mute button 14 volume control location 14 B back panel components 14 battery packs checking battery status 16, 31 disposal and recycling 35 disposing of 35 extending life of 33 installing 18 location 13 low-battery warning 32 recharging 33 release latch 15 Startup Guide Index1 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 2 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Index right panel 13 status lights 12 configuring the notebook 47 connecting AC power 19 infrared device 28 phone line 110 TV (as an external monitor) 28 connectors audio 14 RJ-11 (modem) 14 RJ-45 (network) 14 security 14 S-Video out 14 D decreasing display brightness 26 diskette drive location 14 display adjusting brightness 26 troubleshooting 42 Documentation Library CD 112 drivers reinstalling 412 DVD drive creating data disc 27 creating movie disc 27 location 13 playing movies 27 setting region code 27 E external monitor connecting 28 port location 14 F front panel components 13 function hot keys 26 H hard drive activity status light 16 location 13, 15 troubleshooting 43 Hibernation mode 22 hot keys 26 I identifying components 12 increasing display brightness 26 infrared port connecting a device 28 location 13 printing 29 transferring files 29 using the port 29 inserting the battery pack 18 K keyboard status lights 13, 17 troubleshooting 43 keys 26 L left panel components 14 low-battery warning 32 M mini PCI cover 15 N network jack, location 14 Index2 Startup Guide HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 3 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM O One-Touch buttons 13 on-off button 13 open/close latch 13 Operating System CD reinstall 411 repair 410 P parallel port (LPT1) 14 parts of the notebook back panel 14 bottom panel 15 front panel 13 left panel 14 right panel 13 status lights 16 PC Card slot location 14 ports 1394 14 external monitor 14 infrared 13 LPT1 (parallel) 14 serial port (COM1) 14 USB 14 power button 13, 111 mode status light 16 settings 22 troubleshooting 45 R RAM cover 15 recharging the battery pack 33 reinstalling operating system 411 software 412 Index reinstalling software 48 repairing the operating system 410 reset button location 15 using 23 restoring software 412 right panel components 13 RJ-11 (modem) jack connecting 110 location 14 RJ-45 (network) jack 14 S safeguarding data 49 safety information 11 scroll pad, location 13 serial port (COM1) 14 setting up the notebook connect phone line 110 connect power 19 install battery pack 18 power on 111 set up Windows 112 troubleshooting 46 setup utility 47 slot location cable lock 14 PC Card and CardBus 14 software, restoring 412 software, updating 48 Standby mode 22 status lights battery charge 16 hard drive 16 keyboard 13, 17 Startup Guide Index3 HP_SU_370699-001.book Page 4 Thursday, May 13, 2004 4:39 PM Index location 13 main 13, 16 meanings 16 wireless indicator 13 S-Video out jack location 14 using 28 system recovery 48 T telephone line connection 110 1394 port location 14 toggling built-in keypad 26 TouchPad 13, 24 functions 25 transferring files 29 troubleshooting battery packs 45 display 42 hard drive 43 keyboard 43 power 45 startup 46 turning off the notebook 22 turning on the notebook 111, 22 U updating software 48 USB port location 14 using BIOS Setup Utility 47 V volume control 14 W wireless indicator light 13 on-off button 13 Index4 Startup Guide

DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Title.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Hardware and Software Guide HP Tablet PC Series Document Part Number: 367426-001 December 2004 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Notice-Front.fm PN: HP-367186-001 2004 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Hardware and Software Guide HP Tablet PC Series First Edition December 2004 Reference Number: tc4200 Document Part Number: 367186-001 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001TOC.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Contents Contents 1 Tablet PC Features Pen Components. 11 Top Components . 12 Lights . 12 Pointing Devices . 14 Buttons. 15 Pen-Activated Buttons. 16 Keys . 17 Front Components . 19 Rear Components . 111 Right-Side Components . 113 Left-Side Components . 115 Bottom Components. 117 Additional Hardware Components. 118 2 Power Power Control and Light Locations . 21 Selecting a Power Source. 24 Standby and Hibernation . 25 Standby . 25 Hibernation . 25 Initiating Standby, Hibernation or Shutdown . 26 When You Leave Your Work . 26 When the Power Supply Is Uncertain . 27 When Using Infrared Communication or Drive Media . 27 Hardware and Software Guide v hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001TOC.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Contents Using the Default Power Settings . 28 Turning the Tablet PC or Display On or Off. 28 Initiating or Restoring from Hibernation. 29 Initiating or Resuming from Standby . 210 Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures . 211 Managing Power Options. 211 Accessing the Power Options Window . 212 Displaying the Power Meter Icon . 212 Setting or Changing a Power Scheme . 212 Using a Security Password . 213 Processor Performance Controls . 213 Using Battery Packs . 215 Identifying Battery Packs . 216 Inserting or Removing a Primary Battery Pack. 216 Attaching or Detaching an Optional Travel Battery 218 Charging Battery Packs . 221 Charging the Primary Battery . 222 Charging an Optional Travel Battery . 223 Charging a New Battery Pack . 223 Charging an In-Use Battery Pack . 223 Monitoring the Charge of a Battery Pack . 224 Obtaining Accurate Charge Information . 224 Displaying Charge Information on the Screen . 224 Managing Low-Battery Conditions . 225 Identifying Low-Battery Conditions . 226 Resolving Low-Battery Conditions . 226 Calibrating a Battery Pack . 228 When to Calibrate . 228 How to Calibrate . 228 Conserving Battery Power . 231 Conserving Power As You Work . 231 Selecting Power Conservation Settings. 232 Storing a Battery Pack . 232 Disposing of a Used Battery Pack . 233 Hardware and Software Guide vi hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001TOC.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Contents 3 Pointing Devices and Keyboard Using a Pointing Device. 31 Using the Pointing Stick . 32 Using the TouchPad. 33 Using an External Mouse . 34 Setting Pointing Device Preferences . 34 Using Hotkeys . 35 Hotkey and Shortcut Key Quick Reference . 36 Initiating Standby (fn+f3) . 36 Switching Displays (fn+f4) . 37 Viewing Battery Charge Information (fn+f8) . 37 Decreasing Screen Brightness (fn+f9). 38 Increasing Screen Brightness (fn+f10) . 38 Ambient Light Sensor (fn+f11) . 38 Displaying System Information (fn+esc) . 38 Using Hotkeys with External Keyboards . 38 Keypads . 39 Using the Internal Keypad. 39 Using an External Keypad. 311 Using Presentation Mode . 312 Using Quick Launch Buttons . 313 Quick Launch Buttons Control Panel . 314 Accessing the Quick Launch Buttons Control Panel 314 Setting Presentation Mode Preferences . 315 Setting Advanced Preferences . 317 4 Pen and Command Controls Pen . 41 Entering Information with the Pen . 42 Calibrating the Pen . 44 Setting Pen Preferences . 45 Hardware and Software Guide vii hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001TOC.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Contents Command Controls . 46 Identifying Command Controls . 46 Command Controls Quick Reference . 47 Using Command Controls . 48 Setting Command Control Preferences . 411 On-Screen Keyboard . 414 5 Multimedia Using Audio Features. 51 Using the Audio-In (Microphone) Jack. 52 Using the Audio-Out (Headphone) Jack . 52 Adjusting the Volume . 53 Using Video Features. 54 Using the S-Video Out Jack . 55 Connecting a Monitor or Projector . 56 Using CD and DVD Software . 57 Observing the Copyright Warning . 57 Installing Software. 58 Enabling AutoPlay. 59 Installing the Universal Disc Format Reader . 59 Using Windows Media Player. 510 Using WinDVD Player . 510 Using WinDVD Creator Plus (Select Models Only) 510 Using Sonic RecordNow! . 511 Changing DVD Region Settings . 511 6 Hardware Components Using Drives. 61 Caring for Drives . 61 Adding a Drive to the System . 63 Identifying the Hard Drive Light. 64 Replacing the Primary Hard Drive . 64 Hardware and Software Guide viii hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001TOC.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Contents Using PC Cards . 69 Inserting a PC Card . 610 Removing a PC Card . 611 Using SD Cards . 612 Inserting an SD Card . 612 Removing an SD Card. 613 Adding and Upgrading Memory Modules . 614 Adding or Upgrading a Memory Module in the Expansion Memory Slot . 614 Upgrading the Memory Module in the Primary Memory Module Slot. 619 Effects of Increasing Memory . 624 Connecting a Modem Cable. 625 Using the Modem Cable . 626 Using a Country-Specific Adapter . 626 Connecting a Network Cable . 628 Linking to An Infrared Device. 629 Setting Up an Infrared Transmission. 630 Using Standby with Infrared . 631 Connecting a USB Device . 632 Using a USB Device . 632 Enabling USB Legacy Support . 633 Connecting Optional External Devices . 633 Connecting an Optional External MultiBay and External MultiBay II . 634 7 Q Menu and Desktop Video Profiles Q Menu. 71 Identifying Q Menu Controls . 72 Displaying and Closing the Q Menu . 72 Selecting an Item from the Q Menu . 73 Obtaining Information About System-Defined Items 73 Setting Q Menu Preferences . 74 Using a System-Defined Item . 79 Hardware and Software Guide ix hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001TOC.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Contents Desktop Video Profiles . 716 Identifying Profiles and Modes . 716 Using the Default Profiles . 721 Enabling the Default Profiles . 723 Customizing the Profiles (Optional) . 724 Change Mode Service . 726 Tablet PC Button Driver . 727 8 Wireless Wireless Local Area Network (Select Models Only) . 83 Connecting Your Wireless Tablet PC to a Corporate WLAN . 84 Connecting Your Wireless Tablet PC to a Public WLAN . 84 Setting Up a WLAN in Your Home . 85 Using a WLAN Connection . 86 Using Wireless Security Features . 87 Installing Wireless Software (Optional) . 87 Troubleshooting 802.11 Wireless Devices . 89 Bluetooth (Select Models Only). 810 Turning On, Turning Off, Enabling and Disabling the 802.11 Wireless and Bluetooth Devices . 812 Turning On the 802.11 Wireless and Bluetooth Devices . 814 Turning Off and Disabling the 802.11 Wireless and Bluetooth Devices . 815 9 Security Security Features Quick Reference . 91 Setting Security Preferences in Computer Setup . 92 Using Passwords . 93 HP and Windows Passwords . 94 HP and Windows Password Guidelines . 95 Hardware and Software Guide x hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001TOC.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Contents Using Power-On Passwords. 96 Setting Power-On Passwords. 96 Entering Power-On Passwords . 97 Requiring a Power-On Password at Restart . 97 Using HP Administrator Passwords. 98 Setting HP Administrator Passwords . 98 Entering HP Administrator Passwords . 99 Using DriveLock . 99 Setting DriveLock Passwords . 910 Entering DriveLock Passwords . 912 Requiring a Drivelock Password at Restart. 912 Changing DriveLock Passwords . 913 Removing DriveLock Protection. 914 Disabling a Device . 915 Using System Information . 915 Setting System Information Options . 916 Firewall Software . 916 Connecting an Optional Security Cable. 919 HP ProtectTools Security Manager

(Select Models Only) . 920 Embedded Security for ProtectTools. 920 Credential Manager for ProtectTools . 921 BIOS Configuration for ProtectTools . 921 Smart Card Security for ProtectTools . 922 10MultiBoot Understanding the Default Boot Sequence . 101 Enabling Bootable Devices in Computer Setup. 103 Understanding MultiBoot Results . 104 Setting MultiBoot Preferences . 105 Setting a New Default Boot Sequence . 105 Setting a MultiBoot Express Prompt . 106 Entering MultiBoot Express Preferences . 107 Hardware and Software Guide xi hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm Contents 11Computer Setup Using Computer Setup . 111 Accessing Computer Setup . 112 Restoring Computer Setup Defaults . 112 Selecting from the File Menu . 113 Selecting from the Security Menu . 114 Selecting from the Tools Menu . 116 Selecting from the Advanced Menu . 116 12HP Client Management Solutions Configuration and Deployment . 112 HP Client Manager Software . 112 13Software Update and Recoveries Preparing to Update Software . 111 Obtaining the Support Software CD . 112 Accessing Tablet PC Information . 112 Downloading Software from the Internet . 113 Downloading System ROM. 114 Downloading Other Software . 115 System Recovery . 115 Safeguarding Your Data . 116 Setting System Restore Points. 116 Repairing the Operating System . 117 Reinstalling the Operating System . 117 Reinstalling Device Drivers and Other Software . 119 14Specifications Operating Environment . 111 Rated Input Power . 112 Index xii Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 1 Tablet PC Features Pen Components Component 1 Pen tip Description Interacts with the tablet PC whenever the tip is touching the screen or within 1.27 cm (0.5 inch) of the screen. When tapped on or held over a pen-activated button, activates the button. Hardware and Software Guide 11 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Tablet PC Features Component 2 Pen button 3 Pen tether eyelet Top Components Lights Description Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Used with the tether eyelet on the tablet PC, enables you to tether the pen to the tablet PC. Component Description 1 Volume mute light On: System sound is turned off. 2 caps lock light 3 IDE drive light On: Caps lock is on. On: A drive in the hard drive bay is being accessed. 12 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Tablet PC Features Component Description 4 Battery charge light 5 Power/standby light 6 Wireless light 7 num lock light Amber: A battery pack is charging. Green: A battery pack is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery pack that is the only available power source has reached a low-battery condition. When the battery reaches a critical low-battery condition, the battery light begins blinking more quickly. Off: If the tablet PC is connected to an external power source, the light is turned off when all batteries in the tablet PC are fully charged. If the tablet PC is not connected to an external power source, the light is turned off until the battery reaches a low-battery condition. Green: The tablet PC is on. Blinking green: The tablet PC is in Standby mode. On: An integrated wireless device has been enabled. On: Num lock is on or the embedded numeric keypad is enabled. Hardware and Software Guide 13 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Tablet PC Features Pointing Devices Component 1 Pointing stick 2 Right pointing stick button Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. 3 Touchpad scroll zone*

Scrolls upward or downward. 4 Right TouchPad button*

5 Left TouchPad button*

Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. 14 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Component 6 TouchPad*

7 Left pointing stick button Tablet PC Features Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Can be set to perform other mouse functions, such as scrolling, selecting, and double-clicking. Functions like the left button on an external mouse.

*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the functions of TouchPad features, refer to the Setting Pointing Device Preferences section in Chapter 3, Pointing Devices and Keyboard. Buttons Component Description 1 Presentation mode button Turns on Presentation mode. 2 Volume mute button Turns off tablet PC sound. Hardware and Software Guide 15 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Tablet PC Features Component Description 3 Volume down button Decreases tablet PC sound. 4 Volume up button Increases tablet PC sound. 5 Pen eject button Ejects the pen from the pen holder. Pen-Activated Buttons Component Description 1 Tablet PC Input launch button*

When Windows is running, opens the Microsoft Tablet PC Input Panel application, which includes a handwriting pad and an on-screen keyboard. 16 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Tablet PC Features Component 2 Rotate button*

3 Q Menu button*

Description Switches the image between landscape and portrait orientation. When Windows is running, opens or closes the Q Menu.

*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the functions of the Tablet PC Input launch button, rotate button, and Q Menu button, refer to Chapter 4, Pen and Command Controls. Keys Component 1 Function keys 2 Keypad keys Description Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the fn key. Can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. Hardware and Software Guide 17 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Tablet PC Features Component Description 3 Windows applications key 4 WIndows logo key 5 fn key Displays a shortcut menu for items beneath the pointer. Displays the Microsoft Windows Start menu. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key or the esc key. 18 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Front Components Tablet PC Features Hardware and Software Guide 19 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Tablet PC Features Component 1 Infrared port 2 Bluetooth antenna*

Description Provides wireless communication between the tablet PC and an optional IrDA-compliant device. Sends and receives Bluetooth device signals. Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should be not less than 20 cm (8 inches) during normal operation, including when the tablet PC display is closed. 3 Display release latch Opens the tablet PC.

*The antennae is available on only select models. The antennae is not visible from the outside of the tablet PC. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennae free from obstructions. 110 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Rear Components Tablet PC Features Component 1 USB port Description Connects USB 1.1- and 2.0-compliant devices to the tablet PC using a standard USB cable, or connects an optional external MultiBay or MultiBay II to the tablet PC. The external MultiBay must also be connected to an external power source. 2 RJ-11 (modem) jack Connects a modem cable. 3 RJ-45 (network) jack Connects a network cable. 4 Power connector 5 External monitor port Connects an AC adapter or an optional Automobile Power Adapter/Charger, or Aircraft Power Adapter. Connects an optional external monitor or overhead projector. Hardware and Software Guide 111 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Tablet PC Features Component 6 S-Video out jack 4 Jog dial*

5 Windows Security button*

Description Is a 7-pin, dual-purpose jack. It connects an optional S-Video device, such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card, with an optional, standard (4-pin) S-Video cable. The extra 3 pins also enable an optional S-Video-to-composite adapter to be used with the tablet PC. Functions like enter and the up and down arrow keys on a standard keyboard. Press inward to enter a command. Rotate upward to scroll upward. Rotate downward to scroll downward. When pressed with the pen tip or a small object like the end of a paper clip while:

Windows is open, enters the ctrl+alt+delete command. The Setup utility is open, enters the reset command.

*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the functions of the Windows security button and jog dial, refer to Chapter 4, Pen and Command Controls. To protect your work and the system, the ctrl+alt+delete command cannot be entered using the Ctrl, Alt, and Del keys on the on-screen keyboard. 112 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Right-Side Components Tablet PC Features Component Description 1 Audio-out (headphone) jack 2 Audio-in (microphone) jack 3 USB port Produces system sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, headset, or television audio. Connects an optional monaural or stereo microphone. Connects USB 1.1- and 2.0-compliant devices to the tablet PC using a standard USB cable, or connects an optional external MultiBay or MultiBay II to the tablet PC. The external MultiBay must also be connected to an external power source. Hardware and Software Guide 113 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Tablet PC Features Component Description 4 PC Card eject button 5 PC Card slot 6 SD Card slot Ejects PC Cards from the PC Card slot. Supports optional Type I, Type II, or Type III 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Cards. Accepts SD (Secure Digital) Memory Cards. 114 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Left-Side Components Tablet PC Features Component Description 1 Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the tablet PC. 2 Vent Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrants may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. Enables airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Using the tablet PC on a soft surface, such as a pillow, blanket, rug, or thick clothing, may block airflow. 3 Wireless button*

Turns on wireless LAN or Bluetooth. Hardware and Software Guide 115 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Tablet PC Features Component 4 USB port Description Connects USB 1.1- and 2.0-compliant devices to the tablet PC using a standard USB cable, or connects an optional external MultiBay or external MultiBay II to the tablet PC. The external MultiBay must be connected to an external power source. 5 HP Information Center button content to come 6 Power/standby switch*

7 Speaker 8 Pen holder When the tablet PC is Off, slide to the left and release to turn on the tablet PC. In Standby, slide to the right or left and release to exit Standby. In Hibernation, slide to the right or left and release to exit Hibernation. On, slide to the right and release to enter Standby. If the tablet PC has stopped responding and Microsoft Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, slide to the left and hold for 5 seconds to turn off the tablet PC. Produces tablet PC sound. Secures the pen to the tablet PC.

*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the functions of the power features, refer to the Managing Power Options section in Chapter 2, Power. For inforamtion about changing the functions of the wireless features, refer to Chapter 8, Wireless. 116 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Bottom Components Tablet PC Features Component Description 1 Docking connector 2 Vents (3) Connects the tablet PC to an optional docking device. Enable airflow to cool internal components. To prevent overheating, do not obstruct vents. Using the tablet PC on a soft surface, such as a pillow, blanket, rug, or thick clothing, may block airflow. 3 Travel battery connector Connects an optional travel battery. 4 Hard drive bay Holds the primary hard drive. 5 Primary battery release latch Releases the primary battery pack from the battery bay. 6 Primary battery bay Holds the primary battery pack. 7 Memory module compartment Contains one primary memory slot

(populated). Hardware and Software Guide 117 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap1.fm PN: HP-367426-001 Tablet PC Features Additional Hardware Components Component 1 AC adapter 2 Power cord*

3 Primary battery pack*

4 Modem adapter*

5 Modem cable*

Description Converts AC power to DC power. Connects an AC adapter to an AC wall outlet. Runs the tablet PC when the tablet PC is not connected to external power. Adapts the modem cable for a non-RJ-11 telephone jack. Connects a modem to a telephone jack or a country-specific modem adapter.

*Power cords, modem cables, and modem adapters vary in appearance by region and country. Battery packs vary by model. 118 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 2 Power Power Control and Light Locations Hardware and Software Guide 21 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power Component 1 fn+f3 2 Power/standby switch Description Initiates Standby. When the tablet PC is Off, slide to the left and release to turn on the tablet PC. In Standby, slide to the right or left and release to exit Standby. In Hibernation, slide to the right or left and release to exit Hibernation. On, slide to the right and release to enter Standby. If the tablet PC has stopped responding and Microsoft Windows shutdown procedures cannot be used, slide to the left and hold for 5 seconds to turn off the tablet PC. 3 Power light Green: The tablet PC is on. 22 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Component 4 Standby light 5 Power/standby light 6 Battery light Power Description Blinking green: The tablet PC is in Standby mode. Green: The tablet PC is on. Blinking green: The tablet PC is in Standby mode. Amber: A battery pack is charging. Green: A battery pack is close to full charge capacity. Blinking amber: A battery pack that is the only available power source has reached a low-battery condition. When the battery reaches a critical low-battery condition, the battery light begins blinking more quickly. Off: If the notebook is connected to an external power source, the light is turned off when all batteries in the notebook are fully charged. If the notebook is not connected to an external power source, the light is turned off until the battery reaches a low-battery condition. Hardware and Software Guide 23 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power Selecting a Power Source The tablet PC can run on internal or external AC power. The following table indicates the best power sources for common tasks. Task Work in most software applications Recommended Power Source Charged battery pack in the tablet PC External power supplied through one of the following devices:

AC adapter Optional docking device Optional Aircraft Adapter Optional Automobile Power Adapter/Charger Charge or calibrate a battery pack in the tablet PC Install or modify system software or write to a CD Optional 90W Air/Auto/AC Combo Adapter External power supplied through AC adapter Optional docking device Optional Automobile Power Adapter/Charger Optional 90W Air/Auto/AC Combo Adapter To prevent damage to the tablet PC and aircraft systems, do not charge the battery pack while you are using an Auto/Air/AC Adapter on an aircraft. External power supplied through AC adapter Optional docking device 24 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power Standby and Hibernation Standby and Hibernation are energy-saving features that conserve power and reduce startup time. They can be initiated by you or by the system. Refer to the Initiating Standby, Hibernation or Shutdown section in this chapter for details about when to use each setting. Standby CAUTION: To avoid a complete battery discharge, do not leave your tablet PC in Standby for extended periods. Connect the tablet PC to an external power source. Standby reduces power to system components that are not in use. When Standby is initiated, your work is saved in random access memory (RAM) and the screen is cleared. When you resume from Standby, your work returns to the screen where you left off. Saving your work before initiating Standby is not usually necessary but is a recommended precaution. When the tablet PC is in Standby, the standby light and the power/standby light flash. Hibernation Hibernation saves your work to a hibernation file on the hard drive, and then shuts down the tablet PC. When you restore from Hibernation, your work returns to the screen where you left off. If a power-on password has been set, the password must be entered to restore from Hibernation. You can disable Hibernation. However, if Hibernation is disabled, and the system reaches a low-battery condition, the system will not automatically save your work while power is on or when Standby has been initiated. In the Power Options window, Hibernation is not displayed as an option if it has been disabled. You must enable Hibernation in order to select it in the Power Options window. To verify that Hardware and Software Guide 25 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power Hibernation is enabled, select Start > Control Panel > Power Options > Hibernate tab. Make sure that the Enable hibernate support check box is selected. CAUTION: If the configuration of the tablet PC is changed during Hibernation, resuming from Hibernation may not be possible. When the tablet PC is in Hibernation:

Do not dock or undock the tablet PC in a docking device. Do not add or remove memory modules. Do not insert or remove any hard drives. Do not connect or disconnect external devices. Do not insert or remove a PC Card or a Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card. Initiating Standby, Hibernation or Shutdown The following sections explain when to initiate Standby or Hibernation and when to shut down your tablet PC. When You Leave Your Work Initiating Standby clears the screen and uses less power than leaving the tablet PC on. Your work returns instantly to the screen when you resume from Standby. Initiating Hibernation clears the screen, saves your work to the hard drive, and uses much less power than Standby. Shutting down the tablet PC and removing the battery pack is recommended to extend the life of the battery pack when the tablet PC will be disconnected from external power for an extended period. For details on battery pack storage, refer to the Storing a Battery Pack section in this chapter. 26 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power When the Power Supply Is Uncertain Make sure that Hibernation remains enabled, especially if you are operating the tablet PC on battery power and do not have access to an external power supply. If the battery pack fails, Hibernation saves your work to a hibernation file and shuts down the tablet PC. HP recommends that if you pause your work when the power supply is uncertain, you do one of the following:

Initiate Hibernation. Shut down the tablet PC. Save your work, and then initiate Standby. When Using Infrared Communication or Drive Media CAUTION: Do not initiate Standby or Hibernation while using drive media. Doing so may result in possible video and audio degradation and loss of audio or video playback functionality. Standby and Hibernation interfere with the use of infrared and Bluetooth communication, and drive media. Note the following guidelines:

If the tablet PC is in Standby or Hibernation, you cannot initiate an infrared or Bluetooth transmission. If Standby or Hibernation is accidentally initiated while a drive medium (such as a diskette, CD, or DVD) is in use:

Your playback may be interrupted. You may see a warning message: Putting the computer into Hibernation or Standby may stop the playback. Do you want to continue? Select No. You may need to restart the playback to resume audio and video. Hardware and Software Guide 27 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power Using the Default Power Settings The following tables describe the factory power settings on the tablet PC. You can change many of these settings according to your preference. For more information on changing power settings, refer to the Managing Power Options section in this chapter. Turning the Tablet PC or Display On or Off Task Procedure Result Turn on the tablet PC. Slide the power/standby switch to the left. Shut down the tablet PC.*

Turn off the display while the power is on. Save your work and close all open applications. Then Slide the power/standby switch to the left and follow the on-screen directions (if displayed) for shutting down the tablet PC. Shut down the tablet PC through the operating system. Select Start >

Shut Down> Shut Down

> OK. Close the tablet PC. The power light and the power/standby light are turned on. The operating system loads. The power light and power/standby light are turned off. The operating system shuts down. The tablet PC is turned off. Closing the tablet PC activates the display switch, which turns off the display. This conserves battery power.

* If the system is unresponsive and you are unable to shut down the tablet PC with these procedures, refer to the Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures section in this chapter. 28 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power Initiating or Restoring from Hibernation Task Procedure Result Initiate Hibernation. Allow the system to initiate Hibernation

(with Hibernation enabled). Restoring from user-initiated or system-initiated Hibernation. Select Start > Shut Down>

Hibernate > OK. (If the Hibernate option is not displayed, press and hold the shift key.) If Hibernation has been configured, slide the power/standby switch to the right or left. No action required. If the tablet PC is running on battery power, the system initiates Hibernation after 30 minutes of tablet PC inactivity or when the battery pack(s) reach a critical low-battery condition. If the tablet PC is connected to external power, the system does not initiate Hibernation. Power settings and timeouts can be changed in the Power Options window. Slide the power/standby switch to the right or left. If the system initiated Hibernation because of a critical low-battery condition, connect external power or insert a charged battery pack before you slide the power/standby switch. The power light and power/standby light are turned off. The screen clears. The power light and power/standby light are turned off. The screen clears. The power light and power/standby light are turned on. Your work returns to the screen. Hardware and Software Guide 29 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power Initiating or Resuming from Standby Task Procedure Result Initiate Standby. Allow the system to initiate Standby. Resume from user-initiated or system-initiated Standby. Slide the power/standby switch to the right. With the tablet PC on, press fn+f3. Select Start > Shut Down> Standby > OK.

(If the Standby option is not displayed, press the shift key.) No action required. If the tablet PC is running on battery power, the system initiates Standby after 10 minutes of tablet PC inactivity. (Default setting) If the tablet PC is attached to external power, the system does not initiate Standby. Power settings and timeouts can be changed in the Power Options window. Slide the power/standby switch to the right or left. If the display was closed while the tablet PC was in Standby, open the display. The power light and power/standby light blink. The screen clears. The standby light and power/standby light blink. The screen clears. The standby light and power/standby light are turned off. Your work returns to the screen. 210 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power Using Emergency Shutdown Procedures CAUTION: Emergency shutdown procedures result in the loss of unsaved data. If the tablet PC is unresponsive and you are unable to use normal Windows shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures, in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete. Select Shut Down. Slide and hold the power/standby switch to the left for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the tablet PC from external power and remove the battery pack. For more information about removing and storing the battery pack, refer to the Storing a Battery Pack section in this chapter. Managing Power Options Many default power settings can be changed in the Power Options window. For example, you can set an audio alert to warn you when the battery pack reaches a low-power condition, or you can change the default settings for the power/standby switch. By default, when the tablet PC is on:

Pressing the power/standby switch to the right initiates Standby. Pressing the fn+f3 hotkey, called the sleep button in the operating system, initiates Standby. The display switch turns off the display. The display switch is activated by closing the display. (By default and when using custom settings, the display switch also turns on the tablet PC if the display is opened while the tablet PC is in Standby.) Hardware and Software Guide 211 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power Accessing the Power Options Window To access the Power Options window, double-click the Power Meter icon on the taskbar, or select Start > Control Panel >

Power Options. Displaying the Power Meter Icon The Power Meter icon is on your taskbar by default. The icon changes shape to indicate whether the tablet PC is running on a battery pack or external power. Double-click the icon to display the Power Options window. To hide or show the Power Meter icon on the taskbar:

1. Access the Power Options window. 2. Select the Advanced tab. 3. Select or clear the Always show icon on the taskbar check box. 4. Select Apply. 5. Select OK. If you cannot see an icon you have placed on the taskbar, the icon may be hidden. Select the arrow or vertical bar on the taskbar and expand it to view hidden icons. Setting or Changing a Power Scheme The Power Schemes tab in the Power Options window assigns power levels to system components. You can assign different schemes depending on whether the tablet PC is running on a battery pack or external power. You can also set a power scheme that initiates Standby or turns off the display or hard drive after a time interval that you specify. 212 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power To set a power scheme:

1. Access the Power Options window, and then select the Power Schemes tab. 2. Select the power scheme you wish to modify, and adjust options in the lists on the screen. 3. Select Apply. Using a Security Password You can add a security feature that prompts you for a password when the tablet PC is turned on or restores from Standby or Hibernation. To set a password prompt, access the Power Options window, and then select the Advanced tab. Select the check box for Prompt for password when the computer resumes from Standby, and select Apply. For more information about using security passwords, refer to Chapter 9, Security. Processor Performance Controls On select tablet PC models, Windows XP supports software that enables you to control processor performance. The central processing unit (CPU) speed can be set for optimal performance or for optimal power conservation. For example, the software can be set to trigger an automatic change in processor speed when the power source changes from external power to battery pack power, or when the tablet PC use changes between active and idle. Processor performance controls are managed in the Power Options window. To access Windows XP processor performance controls, select Start > Control Panel > Power Options > Power Schemes tab. Hardware and Software Guide 213 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power The power scheme you select determines how the processor performs when the tablet PC is connected to external power or is running on battery power. Each power scheme for external power or battery power sets a specific processor state. Different states may be used, depending on whether the tablet PC is running on external or battery power. After a power scheme has been set, no other intervention is required to control the performance of your tablet PC processor. The following table describes the processor performance on external and battery power for the available power schemes. Power Scheme Home/Office Desk Portable/Laptop Presentation Processor Performance While on External Power Processor Performance While on Battery Power Always runs at the highest performance state. Performance state is determined based on CPU demand. Performance state is determined based on CPU demand. Performance state is determined based on CPU demand. Performance state is determined based on CPU demand. Starts at lowest performance state, then uses linear performance reduction

(stop-clock throttling) as the battery discharges. 214 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power Scheme Always On Minimal Power Management Max Battery Power Processor Performance While on External Power Processor Performance While on Battery Power Always runs at the highest performance state. Always runs at the highest performance state. Performance state is determined based on CPU demand. Performance state is determined based on CPU demand. Performance state is determined based on CPU demand. Starts at lowest performance state, then uses linear performance reduction

(stop-clock throttling) as the battery discharges. Using Battery Packs When the tablet PC is connected to external AC power, the tablet PC runs on AC power. When a charged battery pack is in the tablet PC and the tablet PC is not connected to external power, the tablet PC runs on battery power. The tablet PC switches between AC power and battery power according to the availability of an external AC power source. For example, if the tablet PC contains a charged battery pack and is running on external AC power supplied through the AC adapter, the tablet PC switches to battery power if the AC adapter is disconnected from the tablet PC. You can leave a battery pack in the tablet PC or in storage, depending on how you work. Keeping a battery pack in the tablet PC enables the battery pack to charge whenever the tablet PC is connected to external AC power and also protects your work in case of a power outage. Hardware and Software Guide 215 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power However, battery packs in the tablet PC slowly discharge when the tablet PC is turned off. For this reason, the primary battery pack is not shipped inside the tablet PC and must be inserted before the tablet PC can run on battery power. Identifying Battery Packs This tablet PC supports up to 2 battery packs:

The primary battery pack is a 6-cell lithium-ion battery pack that can be used only in the battery bay. One primary battery pack is included with the tablet PC. The travel battery pack is an optional 8-cell lithium-ion battery pack that can be used only in the travel battery case. If you will not be using the tablet PC for 2 weeks or more, remove the battery pack and store it as described in the Storing a Battery Pack section in this chapter to prolong battery pack life. For more information about leaving your work, refer to the Initiating Standby, Hibernation or Shutdown section in this chapter. Only compatible AC adapters and battery packs should be used with the tablet PC. For additional information, visit the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com or use the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet, included with your tablet PC, to contact Customer Care. Inserting or Removing a Primary Battery Pack CAUTION: To prevent loss of work when removing a battery pack that is the sole power source, initiate Hibernation or turn off the tablet PC before removing the battery pack. To insert a primary battery pack:

1. Turn the tablet PC upside down. 2. Slide the battery pack 1 into the battery bay until it is seated. 216 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 3. Press the battery pack 2 into the tablet PC. Power Hardware and Software Guide 217 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power To remove a primary battery pack:

1. Turn the tablet PC upside down with the battery bay toward you. 2. Press the battery release latch 1 to the right. 3. Slide the battery pack 2 out of the tablet PC. Attaching or Detaching an Optional Travel Battery To attach an optional travel battery:

1. Turn the tablet PC upside down with the primary battery bay toward you. 218 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power 2. Open the travel battery connector on the bottom of the tablet PC by sliding the cover to the right. Hardware and Software Guide 219 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power 3. Insert the tabs on the travel battery caddy into the recesses on the bottom of the tablet PC 1. 4. Press the travel battery caddy onto the tablet PC until it snaps into place 2. 5. Slide the locking latch 3. 220 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power To detach an optional travel battery:

1. Unlock the travel battery from the tablet PC by sliding the locking switch 1. 2. Press the release latch 2. 3. Lift the travel battery 3 up and away from the tablet PC. Charging Battery Packs Multiple battery packs in the system charge and discharge in a preset sequence:

Charge sequence:

1. Primary battery in the tablet PC battery bay 2. Travel battery Discharge sequence:

1. Travel battery 2. Primary battery in the tablet PC battery bay Hardware and Software Guide 221 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power While a battery pack is charging, the battery light on the tablet PC is on. The light is turned off when all battery packs are fully charged. Battery packs can also be charged in the optional HP Universal Charger. Charging the Primary Battery CAUTION: To prevent damage to the tablet PC and aircraft systems, do not charge the battery pack while you are using an Auto/Air/AC Adapter on an aircraft. The primary battery pack charges when it is inserted into the tablet PC and the tablet PC is connected to external power. External power can be supplied through the following:

AC adapter Optional docking device Optional Automobile Power Adapter/Charger 222 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power Optional 90W Air/Auto/AC Combo Adapter An optional Aircraft Power Adapter can run the tablet PC, but it cannot charge a battery pack. Charging an Optional Travel Battery The battery pack in the travel battery charges when it is attached to the tablet PC and the tablet PC is connected to external power. External power can be supplied through the following:

AC Adapter Optional docking device Optional Automobile Power Adapter/Charger Optional 90W Air/Auto/AC Combo Adapter Because the travel battery covers the docking connector, the travel battery cannot be used or charged with a docking device. An optional Aircraft Power Adapter can run the tablet PC, but it cannot charge a battery pack. Charging a New Battery Pack Fully charge the battery pack while the tablet PC is connected to external power through the AC adapter. A new battery pack that has been partially but not fully charged can run the tablet PC, but the battery charge indicators may be inaccurate. Charging an In-Use Battery Pack To prolong battery life and increase the accuracy of battery charge indicators:

Hardware and Software Guide 223 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power Allow a battery pack to discharge to 10 percent of a full charge through normal use before charging it. When you charge a battery pack, charge it fully. Monitoring the Charge of a Battery Pack This section explains several ways you can determine the amount of charge in your battery pack. Obtaining Accurate Charge Information To increase the accuracy of all battery charge displays:

Allow a battery pack to discharge to about 10 percent of a full charge through normal use before charging it. When you charge a battery pack, charge it fully. If a battery pack has not been used for one month or more, calibrate the battery pack instead of simply charging it. For calibration instructions, refer to the Calibrating a Battery Pack section in this chapter. Displaying Charge Information on the Screen This section explains how to access and interpret battery charge displays. 224 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power Viewing Charge Displays To view information about the status of any battery pack in the tablet PC:

Select the Power Meter icon on the taskbar.

-or-

Select Start > Control Panel > Power Options > Power Meter tab. Interpreting Charge Displays Most charge displays report battery status as both a percentage and as the number of minutes of charge remaining. The percentage indicates the amount of charge remaining in the battery pack. The time indicates the approximate running time remaining on the battery pack if the battery pack continues to provide power at the current level. For example, the time remaining will decrease when you start playing a DVD and will increase when you stop playing a DVD. Most charge displays identify battery packs by location:

Location 1 is the battery pack in the primary battery bay. Location 2 is the optional travel battery pack. On some displays, a lightning bolt icon may be displayed on the charge display beside a battery pack location. The icon indicates that the battery pack in that location is charging. Managing Low-Battery Conditions Some low-battery condition alerts and system responses can be changed in the Power Options window of the operating system. The information in this section describes the alerts and system responses set at the factory. Preferences set in the Power Options window do not affect lights. Hardware and Software Guide 225 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power Identifying Low-Battery Conditions This section explains how to identify low and critical low-battery conditions. Low-Battery Condition When a battery pack that is the only power source for the tablet PC reaches a low-battery condition, the battery light blinks. Critical Low-Battery Condition If a low-battery condition is not resolved, the tablet PC enters a critical low-battery condition. In a critical low-battery condition:

If Hibernation is enabled and the tablet PC is on or in Standby, the tablet PC initiates Hibernation. If Hibernation is disabled and the tablet PC is on or in Standby, the tablet PC remains briefly in Standby, then shuts down and loses your unsaved work. To verify that Hibernation is enabled, select Start > Control Panel > Power Options > Hibernate tab. Make sure that the Enable hibernate support check box is selected. Resolving Low-Battery Conditions CAUTION: If the tablet PC has reached a critical low-battery condition and has initiated Hibernation, do not restore power until the power/standby light is turned off. 226 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power When External Power Is Available To resolve a low-battery condition when external power is available, do one of the following:

Connect the AC adapter. Plug an optional Automobile Power Adapter/Charger into the tablet PC and into a vehicle cigarette lighter receptacle. Plug an optional 90W Air/Auto/AC Combo Adapter into the tablet PC and into a vehicle cigarette lighter receptacle or into the in-seat power supply available on some commercial aircraft. To prevent damage to the tablet PC and aircraft systems, do not charge the battery pack while you are using an Auto/Air/AC Adapter on an aircraft. Plug an optional Aircraft Power Adapter into the tablet PC and into the in-seat power supply available on some commercial aircraft. (An optional Aircraft Power Adapter can run the tablet PC but cannot charge a battery pack.) When a Charged Battery Pack Is Available To resolve a low-battery condition when a charged battery pack is available, turn off the tablet PC or initiate Hibernation, insert a charged battery pack, and then turn on the tablet PC. When No Power Source Is Available To resolve a low-battery condition when no power source is available, initiate Hibernation, or save your work and shut down the tablet PC. When theTablet PC Cannot Exit Hibernation To resolve a low-battery condition when the tablet PC lacks the power to exit Hibernation:

1. Insert a charged battery pack or connect external power. Hardware and Software Guide 227 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power 2. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power/standby switch to the right or left. Calibrating a Battery Pack This section describes when and how to calibrate a battery pack. When to Calibrate Even if a battery pack is heavily used, it should not be necessary to calibrate it more than once a month. It is not necessary to calibrate a new battery pack before first use. Calibrate the battery pack under the following conditions:

When battery charge displays seem inaccurate. When you observe a significant decrease in battery run time. When the battery pack has been unused for one month or more. How to Calibrate To calibrate a battery pack, you must fully charge, fully discharge, then fully recharge the battery pack. Charging the Battery Pack A battery pack can charge whether the tablet PC is off or in use, but it will charge faster when the tablet PC is off. To charge the battery pack:

1. Insert the battery pack into the tablet PC. 2. Connect the tablet PC to an AC outlet or an optional Automobile Power Adapter/Charger. The battery light on the tablet PC is turned on. 3. Leave the tablet PC connected to external power until the battery pack is fully charged. The battery light on the tablet PC is turned off. 228 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Discharging the Battery Pack Power Before you begin a full discharge, disable Hibernation. To disable Hibernation:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Power Options > Hibernate tab. 2. Clear the Enable Hibernation check box. 3. Select Apply. The tablet PC must remain on while the battery pack is being discharged. The battery pack can discharge whether or not you are using the tablet PC, but will discharge faster while the tablet PC is in use. If you plan to leave the tablet PC unattended during the discharge, save your work before beginning the discharge procedure. If you use the tablet PC occasionally during the discharge procedure and have set energy-saving timeouts, expect the following performance from your system during the discharge process:

The monitor will not turn off automatically. Hard drive speed will not decrease automatically while the tablet PC is idle. System-initiated Standby will not occur. To fully discharge a battery pack:

1. Select the Power Meter icon on the taskbar, or access the Power Schemes tab by selecting Start > Control Panel >

Power Options > Power Schemes tab. 2. Make a note of the 2 settings in the Plugged In column and the 2 settings in the Running on Batteries column so that you can reset them after the calibration. 3. Use the drop-down lists to set the 4 options (2 in each column) to Never. Hardware and Software Guide 229 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power 4. Select OK. 5. Disconnect the tablet PC from the external power source, but do not turn off the tablet PC. 6. Run the tablet PC on battery power until the battery pack is fully discharged. The battery light begins to blink when the battery pack has discharged to a low-battery condition. When the battery pack is fully discharged, the battery light is turned off and the tablet PC shuts down. Recharging the Battery Pack To recharge the battery pack:

1. Connect the tablet PC to external power and maintain the connection until the battery pack is fully recharged. The battery light on the tablet PC is turned off. You can use the tablet PC while the battery pack is recharging but the battery pack will charge faster if the tablet PC is off. 2. If the tablet PC is off, turn it on when the battery pack is fully charged and the battery light is turned off. 3. Access the Power Schemes tab by selecting Start > Control Panel > Power Options > Power Schemes tab. 4. Refer to the settings you recorded earlier. Reenter the settings that you recorded for the items in the Plugged In column and the Running on Batteries column. 5. Select OK. CAUTION: After calibrating the battery pack, reenable Hibernation. Failure to reenable Hibernation may result in a complete battery drain and potential data loss. To reenable Hibernation, select Start > Settings > Control Panel >

Power Options > Hibernate tab. Select the Enable Hibernation check box, and then select Apply. 230 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power Conserving Battery Power Using the battery conservation procedures and settings described in this section extends the time that a battery pack can run the tablet PC from a single charge. Conserving Power As You Work To conserve power as you use the tablet PC:

Turn off wireless and local area network (LAN) connections and exit modem applications when you are not using them. Disconnect external devices you are not using that are not connected to an external power source. Stop or remove a PC Card you are not using. For more information, refer to Chapter 6, Hardware Components. Use the fn+f9 and fn+f10 hotkeys to adjust screen brightness as you need it. Use optional powered speakers instead of the internal speakers, or use the volume buttons to adjust system volume as you need it. Turn off a device connected to the S-Video out jack by using the fn+f4 hotkey or by turning off support for the device in Windows. Run the tablet PC on external power while formatting a diskette. If you leave your work, initiate Standby or Hibernation or shut down the tablet PC. Hardware and Software Guide 231 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power Selecting Power Conservation Settings To set the tablet PC to conserve power:

Select a short wait for the screen saver and select a screen saver with minimal graphics and motion. To access screen saver settings, select Start > Control Panel > Display >

Screen Saver tab. Select a Power Scheme with low-power-use settings through the operating system. Refer to the Setting or Changing a Power Scheme section in this chapter. Storing a Battery Pack If a tablet PC will be unused and unplugged for more than 2 weeks, remove any battery packs and store them separately. CAUTION: To prevent damage to a battery pack, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. High temperatures accelerate the self-discharge rate of a stored battery pack. To prolong the charge of a stored battery pack, place it in a cool, dry place. Use the following table to estimate how long you can safely store a battery pack. The storage times provided are based on a battery pack that contains 50 percent of a full charge. A fully charged battery pack can be safely stored for longer times; a battery pack containing a lower charge can be safely stored for less time. Calibrate a battery pack that has been stored for one month or more before using it. Temperature Range F Temperature Range C 115 to 140 79 to 113 32 to 77 46 to 60 26 to 45 0 to 25 Safe Storage Time Less than 1 month No more than 3 months 1 year 232 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power Disposing of a Used Battery Pack WARNING: There is a risk of fire and chemical burn if a battery pack is handled improperly. Do not disassemble, crush, or puncture a battery pack or short the contacts on a battery pack. Do not expose a battery pack to temperatures higher than 60C (140F), or dispose of a battery pack in water or fire. When a battery pack has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of it in general household waste. In Europe, dispose of or recycle battery packs by using the public collection system or by returning them to HP, your authorized HP service partners, or their agents. In other regions, refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet, included with the tablet PC, to contact Customer Care and request information about battery pack disposal. For more information about battery pack precautions and disposal and the complete text of governmental agency notices, refer to the Regulatory and Safety Notices guide on the Tablet PC Documentation CD. Hardware and Software Guide 233 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap2.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Power 234 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 3 Pointing Devices and Keyboard Using a Pointing Device The pointing stick and TouchPad controls can be used interchangeably. Component 1 Pointing stick 2 Right pointing stick button Description Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. 3 Touchpad scroll zone*

Scrolls upward or downward. Hardware and Software Guide 31 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard Component Description 4 Right TouchPad button*

5 Left TouchPad button*

6 TouchPad*

7 Left pointing stick button Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Can be set to perform other mouse functions, such as scrolling, selecting, and double-clicking. Functions like the left button on an external mouse.

*This table describes default settings. For information about changing the functions of TouchPad features, refer to the Setting Pointing Device Preferences section in this chapter. Using the Pointing Stick To move the pointer, press the pointing stick in the direction you want to move the pointer. Use the left and right pointing stick buttons as you would the left and right buttons on an external mouse. 32 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard To change the pointing stick cap:

1. Turn off the tablet PC. 2. Gently pull off the used pointing stick cap. 3. Press a replacement cap into place. Replacement caps are not included with the tablet PC. Using the TouchPad To move the pointer, slide your finger across the TouchPad surface in the direction you want the pointer to go. Use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would the left and right buttons on an external mouse. To scroll up and down using the TouchPad vertical scroll zone, slide your finger up or down over the raised area. Hardware and Software Guide 33 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard Using an External Mouse An external USB mouse can be connected to the tablet PC using one of the ports on the right or left side of the tablet PC. An external serial mouse can be connected to the serial port on the right side of the tablet PC. An external PS/2 or USB mouse can be connected to the system using the connectors on an optional docking device. Setting Pointing Device Preferences Mouse Properties in Windows enables you to customize settings for pointing devices, including Enabling or disabling a pointing device (enabled by default). TouchPad tapping, which enables you to tap the TouchPad once to select an object or twice to double-click an object

(disabled by default). Edge motion, which enables you to continue to scroll even though your finger has reached the edge of the TouchPad

(disabled by default). Palm Check, which helps prevent moving the pointer unintentionally if your palms contact the TouchPad as you type (disabled by default). Other features, such as mouse speed preferences and mouse trails, are also found in the Mouse Properties window. To access Mouse Properties:

Select Start > Control Panel > Mouse icon. 34 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard Using Hotkeys Hotkeys are preset combinations of the fn key 1, one of the function keys 2, or the esc key 3, The icons on the f3, f4, and f8 through f10 keys represent the hotkey functions. Hotkey functions and procedures are discussed in the following sections. Hardware and Software Guide 35 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard Hotkey and Shortcut Key Quick Reference Function Initiate Standby Switch between tablet PC display and external display View battery information Decrease screen brightness Increase screen brightness Display system information Key combination to activate function Key combination to deactivate function fn+f3 fn+f4 fn+f8 fn+f9 fn+f10 fn+esc Power/standby switch fn+f4 fn+f8 N/A N/A fn+esc Initiating Standby (fn+f3) When the tablet PC is on, press the fn+f3 hotkey to initiate Standby. When Standby is initiated, your work is saved in random access memory (RAM), the screen is cleared, and power is conserved. While the tablet PC is in Standby, the standby light and the power/standby light blink. To exit Standby, press the power/standby switch to the right or left. The fn+f3 hotkey is set at the factory to initiate Standby. The function of the fn+f3 hotkey, called the sleep button in Windows, can be changed. For example, the fn+f3 hotkey can be set to initiate Hibernation instead of Standby. For more information about Standby, Hibernation, and changing the function of the fn+f3 hotkey, refer to Chapter 2, Power. 36 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard Switching Displays (fn+f4) The fn+f4 hotkey switches the image among display devices connected to the external monitor connector or the S-Video jack on the tablet PC. For example, if an external monitor is connected to the tablet PC, pressing the fn+f4 hotkey multiple times toggles the image between the tablet PC display, the external monitor display, and a simultaneous display on both the tablet PC and the monitor. Most external monitors receive video information from the tablet PC using the external VGA video standard. The fn+f4 hotkey can also toggle images among other devices receiving video information from the tablet PC. The following five video transmission types, with examples of devices that use them, are supported by the fn+f4 hotkey:

LCD (tablet PC display) External VGA (most external monitors) S-Video (televisions, camcorders, VCRs, and video capture boards with S-Video in jacks) Composite video (televisions, camcorders, VCRs, and video capture boards with composite-video in jacks) DVI-D (external monitors that support the DVI-D interface) DVI-D can be connected to the tablet PC only when the notebook is docked in an optional docking device. Viewing Battery Charge Information (fn+f8) Press fn+f8 to display charge information for all installed battery packs. The display indicates which battery packs are charging and reports the amount of charge remaining in each battery pack. Battery pack locations are indicated by number:

Location 1 is the primary battery pack. Location 2 is the travel battery pack. Hardware and Software Guide 37 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard Decreasing Screen Brightness (fn+f9) Press fn+f9 to decrease screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to decrease the brightness level incrementally. Increasing Screen Brightness (fn+f10) Press fn+f10 to increase screen brightness. Hold down the hotkey to increase the brightness level incrementally. Ambient Light Sensor (fn+f11) Press fn+f11 to turn on and off the ambient light sensor. For more information about the ambient light sensor, refer to the Setting the Ambient Light Sensor section in this chapter. Displaying System Information (fn+esc) Press fn+esc to display information about system hardware components and software version numbers. Press fn+esc a second time to remove the system information from the screen. The system BIOS date is the version number of the system ROM. The BIOS date may display in a decimal format, such as 10/19/2002 F.07. Using Hotkeys with External Keyboards The hotkeys available for use with optional external keyboards differ depending on the type of external keyboard you use. USB keyboards support only the Hotkey functions controlled by the Quick Launch Buttons control panel. For more information about the Quick Launch Buttons control panel, refer to the Quick Launch Buttons Control Panel section later in this chapter. 38 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard The following table describes how certain hotkeys and shortcut keys are used on external keyboards:

Tablet PC Keys fn+f3 External Keyboard Keys scroll lock+scroll lock+f3 (PS/2 keyboards only) scroll lock+scroll lock+f4 (PS/2 keyboards only) scroll lock+scroll lock+f8 scroll lock+scroll lock+f9 (PS/2 keyboards only) scroll lock+scroll lock+f10 (PS/2 keyboards only) scroll lock+scroll lock+f11 scroll lock+scroll lock+esc fn+f4 fn+f8 fn+f9 fn+f10 fn+f11 fn+esc Keypads The tablet PC has an embedded numeric keypad and also supports an optional external keypad or an optional external keyboard that includes a numeric keypad. Using the Internal Keypad The 15 keys of the embedded numeric keypad can be used like the keys on an external numeric keypad. When the embedded numeric keypad is turned on, each key on the keypad performs the function indicated by the icon in the upper right corner of the key. Hardware and Software Guide 39 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard Item 1 2 3 4 Component fn key num lock light num lk key Embedded numeric keypad Enabling and Disabling the Embedded Numeric Keypad Press fn+num lk to enable the embedded numeric keypad. The num lock light is turned on. Press fn+num lk again to return the keys to their standard keyboard functions. The embedded numeric keypad does not work while an external keyboard or numeric keypad is connected to the tablet PC or to an optional docking device. 310 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard Switching Key Functions on the Embedded Numeric Keypad You can temporarily switch the functions of keys on the embedded numeric keypad between their standard keyboard functions and their keypad functions by using the fn key or the fn+shift key combination. To change the function of a keypad key to keypad functions while the keypad is off, press and hold the fn key while pressing the keypad key. To use the keypad keys temporarily as standard keys while the keypad is on:

Press and hold the fn key to type in lowercase. Press and hold fn+shift to type in uppercase. Using an External Keypad Most keys on most external keypads function differently according to whether num lock mode is on or off. For example:

When num lock is on, most keypad keys type numbers. When num lock is off, most keypad keys function like the arrow, page up, or page down keys. When num lock on an external keypad is turned on, the num lock light on the tablet PC is turned on. When num lock on an external keypad is turned off, the num lock light on the tablet PC is turned off. If an external numeric keypad is connected, the embedded numeric keypad cannot be turned on. Enabling or Disabling Num Lock Mode As You Work To turn num lock on or off on an external numeric keypad as you work, press the num lk key on the external numeric keypad, not on the tablet PC. Hardware and Software Guide 311 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard Enabling or Disabling Num Lock Mode As You Work To turn num lock on or off on an external keypad as you work, press the num lk key on the external keypad, not on the tablet PC. Using Presentation Mode The Presentation mode button toggles Presentation mode on and off. Turning Presentation mode on opens an application, folder, file, or Web site that you specify. The image simultaneously displays on the tablet PC screen and on an external device connected to the external monitor port or S-Video out jack on the rear panel, or to ports and jacks on an optional docking device. When you first select the Presentation mode button, the Presentation Settings dialog box displays. In this dialog box, you can Set the program to start when the button is pressed. Choose a power scheme. Choose whether you want to show the Presentation Settings dialog box each time you press Presentation mode button. 312 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard If you do not select this option, each time you press the Presentation mode button, the Presentation Settings dialog box displays and you have to select Continue to open the program, application, folder, file, or Web site you have selected to start when the button is pressed. Automatically switch to an external display. You can modify the Presentation mode settings using the Quick Launch Button control panel. Refer to Setting Presentation Mode Preferences in this chapter for information on setting Presentation mode settings. Using Quick Launch Buttons The tablet PC has two Quick Launch buttons that open frequently used applications when you press them. Hardware and Software Guide 313 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard Item Component Description 1 Presentation mode button Starts Presentation mode, which optimizes for an external monitor or projects and opens a user-defined program such as Microsoft PowerPoint. 2 HP Information Center button content to come. Quick Launch Buttons Control Panel You can use the Quick Launch Buttons control panel to Change Presentation mode settings. Set advanced preferences, including Setting preferences for the display of the Quick Launch Buttons icon. Setting preferences for the ambient light sensor. The following sections provide instructions for setting preferences within the control panel. For additional on-screen information about any item on the control panel, select the help button in the upper-right corner of the window. The help button is identified by a question mark icon. Accessing the Quick Launch Buttons Control Panel You can access the Quick Launch Buttons control panel from the Start button or from an icon that you can display in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar) or Windows desktop. To access the Quick Launch Buttons control panel from the Start button:

Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Quick Launch Buttons. 314 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard Setting Presentation Mode Preferences Setting the Presentation Mode Button To set an application, folder, file, or Web site to start when the Presentation mode button is pressed:

1. Open the Quick Launch Buttons control panel:

Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Quick Launch Buttons.

- or -

Select the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar) or Windows desktop. 2. Select the Presentation tab. 3. In the box under Program to Start, add the application, folder, file, or Web site you want to start when the Presentation mode button is pressed, or select Browse to view available applications, folders, files, or Web sites. 4. To save your preferences and close the display, select OK. Changing the Power Scheme By default the Presentation power scheme is selected when the Presentation mode button is pressed. To change the power scheme:

1. Open the Quick Launch Buttons control panel:

Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Quick Launch Buttons.

- or -

Select the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar) or Windows desktop. 2. Select the Presentation tab. Hardware and Software Guide 315 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard 3. Select an option from the drop-down list box, or select Power Options to open the Microsoft Power Options control panel to view or change the current power scheme. 4. To save your preferences and close the display, select OK. Showing the Welcome Screen You can choose to show the Quick Launch Buttons Properties dialog box each time you press the Presentation mode button. By default, this option is turned off. To turn it on select the check box next to Show Welcome Screen when Presentation mode button is pressed. Switching to an External Display By default, the Automatically switch to external display setting in the Presentation tab is not selected. When you press the Presentation mode button, the application, folder, file, or Web site you selected in the Program to Start setting opens. If you select the Automatically switch to external display setting and press the Presentation mode button, the display is switched to the external display connected to your tablet PC and the application, folder, file, or Web site you selected in the Program to Start setting opens. You can toggle between displays by pressing the Presentation mode button. 316 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard Setting Advanced Preferences You can set the icon and ambient light sensor in the Quick Launch Button control panel. Displaying the Quick Launch Buttons Icon To show or hide the Quick Launch Buttons Properties icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar) or your Windows desktop:

1. Open the Quick Launch Buttons control panel:

Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Quick Launch Buttons.

- or -

Select the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar) or Windows desktop. 2. Select the Advanced tab. On the Advanced tab you can Display or hide the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar), or on the desktop. To display the icon, select the Show icon on the taskbar or Show icon on the desktop check box. To hide the icon, clear the Show icon on the taskbar or Show icon on the desktop check box. 3. To save your preferences and close the display, select OK. Hardware and Software Guide 317 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard Setting the Ambient Light Sensor The tablet PC features a built-in light sensor that enables the tablet PC to automatically adjust the screen brightness according to the ambient lighting level. When the lighting of your environment changes, the ambient light sensor detects the change and automatically adjusts the screen brightness. You can turn the ambient light sensor on and off in 3 ways:

By pressing fn+f11 Through the Quick Launch Buttons control panel By the Quick Launch Buttons control panel icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar) or Windows desktop. To turn on and off the ambient light sensor using the Quick Launch Buttons control panel or the Quick Launch icon, the Quick Launch Buttons software must be installed. To turn the ambient light sensor on and off using the ambient light sensor hotkeys, press fn+f11. 318 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard You can turn on and off the ambient light sensor using the Quick Launch Buttons software:

1. Open the Quick Launch Buttons software:

Select Start > Control Panel > Quick Launch Buttons.

-or-

Select the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar) or Windows desktop. 2. Select the Advanced tab. 3. Select or clear the Enable Ambient Light Sensor check box. 4. Select Apply, and then select OK. You can turn on and off the ambient light sensor using the Quick Launch Buttons icon:

1. Right-click the Quick Launch Buttons icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar) or Windows desktop. 2. Select Turn Ambient Light Sensor On or Turn Ambient Light Sensor Off. Hardware and Software Guide 319 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap3.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pointing Devices and Keyboard 320 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap4.fm PN: HP-367186-001 4 Pen and Command Controls Pen You can enter and access information on the tablet PC by voice

(supported in English only), pen, and command controls. This chapter provides information about using the pen and command controls. You can write with the pen in pen-specific applications such as the Tablet PC Input Panel, in all Microsoft Office applications, and in most other Windows applications and utilities. The information you write on the screen with the pen can be filed, searched, and shared among most Windows applications. To access basic information about using the pen within the operating system, refer to the printed Windows XP Tablet PC Edition Start Here guide included with the tablet PC. To access on-screen tutorials which include more detailed information about using the pen in the tablet PC system:

1. Open Windows Explorer. To open Windows Explorer from the Start button, select Start > All Programs >

Accessories > Windows Explorer. 2. In Windows Explorer, select My Computer > Local Disk (C:) > WINDOWS > Help > latute.hta. Hardware and Software Guide 41 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap4.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pen and Command Controls Entering Information with the Pen Identifying the Pen Tip and Pen Button The pen interacts with the tablet PC whenever the tip of the pen 1 is within 1.27 cm (0.5 inch) from the screen. The pen button 2 emulates the functions of the right-click button on an external mouse. Holding the Pen Hold the pen as if you were writing with a standard pen or pencil. Position your hand on the pen so that you will not accidentally press the pen button. As you monitor the movements of the pen, focus on the pointer, not on the tip of the pen. 42 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap4.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pen and Command Controls Performing Mouse Clicks with the Pen To select an item on the screen as you would with the left button of an external mouse:

Tap the item with the tip of the pen. To double-click an item on the screen as you would with the left button of an external mouse:

Tap the item twice with the tip of the pen. To select an item as you would with the right button of an external mouse:

Press and hold down the pen button, then tap the item with the tip of the pen. Performing Other Procedures with the Pen In addition to emulating mouse clicks, the pen can be used for the following tasks:

To display the pointer location, hold the pen tip immediately over any location on the tablet PC screen without touching the screen with the pen tip. To display the menu options related to an item on the screen, tap the screen with the pen tip. To write with the pen, write on the screen with the tip of the pen. To press a pen-activated button, tap the button with the tip of the pen. Pressure-Sensitivity The tablet PC pen is equipped with a pressure-sensitive feature. This means that you can manipulate the pen to create lines of various thickness, depending upon the amount of pressure you use to write. Hardware and Software Guide 43 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap4.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pen and Command Controls Calibrating the Pen The pen can function at the default calibration or at a calibration set by another user. However, HP highly recommends that you use the pen only while it is calibrated to your personal handwriting and mouse action motions. Calibration optimizes pen performance for all users and particularly for left-handed users. To calibrate the pen:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Tablet and Pen Settings > Settings tab. 2. Select Calibrate. 3. Follow the instructions on the screen. Tap the pen in the exact center of each of the calibration markers. The calibration markers are displayed on the screen as plus signs (+). Be sure to calibrate the pen for use in both portrait and landscape orientations. You can display information about any setting in the Tablet and Pen Settings window by selecting the question mark button in the upper right corner of the window, then selecting a setting. A definition, explanation, or procedure is displayed. 44 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap4.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pen and Command Controls Using the Pen Holder To protect the pen when you are not using it, insert the pen, tip first, into the pen holder on the tablet PC. Setting Pen Preferences Pen preferences are set in the Tablet and Pen Settings window of the operating system. The preferences include settings that optimize handwriting recognition and the location of on-screen menus for either right-handed or left-handed users. To access the pen settings:

Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware icon > Tablet and Pen Settings window > Pen Options tab. The preferences you set in the Tablet and Pen Settings window are specific to the pen and the tablet PC. Pointing device preferences, such as pointer speed, click speed, and mouse trails, that apply to any pointing device in the system, are set in the Mouse Properties window. For instructions, refer to Chapter 3, Pointing Devices and Keyboard. Hardware and Software Guide 45 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap4.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pen and Command Controls Command Controls The 5 command controls enable you to enter commands usually entered with keyboard keys while you are using the tablet PC without an external keyboard. The command controls can also be used while you are using the on-screen keyboard or an optional keyboard. Identifying Command Controls Component Description 1 Tablet PC Input Panel launch button 2 Q Menu button 3 Rotate button 4 Windows Security button 5 Jog dial 46 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap4.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pen and Command Controls Command Controls Quick Reference The following table identifies the default setting and activation procedure for each command control. To activate a pen-activated button, tap the button with the tip of the pen. To activate a manually activated button, press and release the button. Button Default Function Activation Tablet PC Input Panel launch button*

Opens and closes the Tablet PC Input Panel application, which includes a writing pad and the on-screen keyboard. Rotate button* Switches the image between landscape and portrait orientation. Opens and closes the Q Menu. Pen Pen Pen Q menu button*

Windows Security button*

In Windows, functions like the ctrl+alt+delete command on a standard keyboard. In the Setup utility, functions like the reset button on some computers. Manual Jog dial*

Enters commands or scrolls the image upward or downward. Manual

*These controls are programmable. For instructions, refer to Setting Command Control Preferences, later in this chapter. Hardware and Software Guide 47 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap4.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pen and Command Controls Using Command Controls Tablet PC Input Panel Launch Button Tap the Tablet PC Input Panel launch button with the pen tip when the tablet PC is in Windows to open the Tablet PC Input Panel application. The Tablet PC Input Panel application displays a keyboard on the screen and can also display a writing pad, which supports handwriting. To enter the ctrl+alt+delete command, press the Windows Security button on the tablet PC with the pen tip or a small object like the end of a paper clip. Rotate Button Tap the rotate button with the pen tip when the tablet PC is in Windows to rotate the image on the screen 90 degrees. For example, if the image is in landscape orientation, tap the rotate button to rotate the image to portrait orientation. Q Menu Button Press the Q menu button manually when Windows is running to open or close the Q Menu. The Q Menu provides quick access to programmable tasks and destinations including:

System controls, such as volume and screen brightness. Key simulations such as Capture Screen, which functions like the print screen key on a standard keyboard. Applications, files, or folders on a drive, a network, or the Internet. To select an item from the Q Menu without using the pen or a keyboard, press the Q menu button to display the Q Menu, rotate the jog dial upward or downward until your selection is highlighted, then press the jog dial inward. For more information about using the Q Menu, refer to Chapter 7, Q Menu Software. 48 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap4.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pen and Command Controls Windows Security Button Press the Windows Security button with the pen tip or a small object like the end of a paper clip to enter the ctrl+alt+delete command while you are in Windows or the reset command while you are in the Setup utility. Ctrl+Alt+Delete Command When the tablet PC is in Windows, the Windows Security button clears your work from the screen and displays the Windows Security window in which you can lock, log off, or shut down the tablet PC, initiate Standby or Hibernation, or open Task Manager. The Shut Down option in the ctrl+alt+delete window enables you to safely shut down the tablet PC if the system has become unresponsive. Task Manager displays the status of all open applications and enables you to close an application that has become unresponsive. If the system remains unresponsive after selecting Shut Down in the Windows Security window, slide and hold the power switch for 4 seconds. For additional shut down procedures, refer to Chapter 2, Power. For information about using the ctrl+alt+delete command in non-Windows applications, refer to the application documentation. Reset Command When the Setup utility is open, the Windows Security button simulates the reset button found on some computers. When the tablet PC is reset, the tablet PC restarts and all unsaved information is lost. The reset function can be used to restore functionality when the system has become unresponsive. For information about the Setup utility, which is a non-Windows utility, refer to Chapter 11, Computer Setup. Hardware and Software Guide 49 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap4.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pen and Command Controls Jog Dial Press or rotate the jog dial manually to enter commands or scroll vertically:

Press inward to simulate the function of the enter key on a standard keyboard. Rotate upward or downward to scroll toward the top or bottom of an image. At the default setting, the jog dial scrolls line by line like the up and down arrow keys on a standard keyboard. The jog dial can be set to scroll page by page like the page up and page down keys on a standard keyboard or three lines at a time like a mouse wheel. Other settings, in addition to scroll functions, are also available. For instructions, refer to Setting Command Control Preferences, next in this chapter. 410 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap4.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pen and Command Controls Setting Command Control Preferences All command controls except the Display Toggle button and the enter function of the jog dial can be customized to launch applications, simulate key combinations, or perform preset system functions. Each programmable command control can be assigned to 4 settings. Each setting applies only to 1 of 4 views:

Portrait-Primary Portrait-Secondary Landscape-Primary Landscape-Secondary Command control preferences are set in the Tablet and Pen Settings window. You must select a view before setting a preference. Each view is illustrated in the Button Location pane of the Tablet and Pen Settings window as you select it. If you are unfamiliar with the four views, you may want to read Selecting a View next in this section, before setting a command control preference. Selecting a View In the Portrait-Primary and Portrait-Secondary views, the image is displayed vertically, in portrait orientation. In the Landscape-

Primary and Landscape-Secondary views, the image is displayed horizontally, in landscape orientation. A portrait view is often optimal when you are using the tablet PC as a handheld. A landscape view is often optimal when you are displaying the image on an optional external monitor or projector. Hardware and Software Guide 411 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap4.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pen and Command Controls In the primary views (Portrait-Primary and Landscape-Primary), the image switches clockwise between vertical and horizontal. In the secondary views (Portrait-Secondary and Landscape-

Secondary), the image switches counterclockwise between vertical and horizontal. Left-handed users may find the secondary views more convenient. HP recommends that you not use a secondary view while using the internal wireless. The positions commonly occupied by the tablet PC, external devices, and users while the tablet PC is in a secondary view may obstruct the antennas. When you are facing the tablet PC screen with the tablet PC in portrait orientation, the antennas, not visible from the outside of the tablet PC, are on the right and left sides of the tablet PC, near the upper corners. To switch the system among the Portrait-Primary, Landscape-

Primary, Portrait-Secondary, and Landscape-Secondary views:

1. Press the Q menu button. 2. Select a view from the Q Menu. (The system switches to the view you select.) For more information about using the Q Menu, including instructions for adding or removing items from the Q Menu, refer to Chapter 7, Q Menu Software. 412 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap4.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pen and Command Controls Assigning or Changing a Preference To assign or change the function of a programmable command control:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Tablet and Pen Settings > Tablet Buttons tab. 2. In the Button Settings For field, select the view in which you want to use your preference. (The view is illustrated in the Button Location panel.) 3. In the Tablet Button drop-down list, select the button you plan to assign. To assign or change the function of rotating the jog dial upward, select Up. To assign or change the function of rotating the jog dial downward, select Down. 4. Select Change. (The Button Action dialog box opens.) 5. Select your preference in the Button Action dialog box. To save your preference, select OK or Apply. Returning All Command Controls to Default Settings To return the settings on all command controls to their default settings:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Tablet and Pen Settings > Tablet Buttons tab. 2. In the Button Settings For field, select the view in which you want to change all command controls to their default settings. 3. Select Reset. (All command controls are returned to their default settings only in the orientation currently selected.) 4. Select Apply, and then select OK. Hardware and Software Guide 413 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap4.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Pen and Command Controls On-Screen Keyboard The Tablet PC Input Panel application displays a keyboard on the screen. This on-screen keyboard simulates the functions of an optional keyboard. To open the Tablet PC Input Panel application, tap the Tablet PC Input Panel launch button 1 with the pen. To type, tap a key. To switch the keys displayed in the top row between number keys and function keys, tap Func. To enter the ctrl+alt+delete command, press the Windows Security button 2 on the tablet PC with the pen tip or a small object like the end of a paper clip. To protect your work and the system, the ctrl+alt+delete command cannot be entered using the Ctrl, Alt, and Del keys on the on-screen keyboard. For more information about using the Tablet PC Input Panel application, refer to theTablet PC Input Panel Launch Button section earlier in this chapter. 414 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/10/04 File: Chap5.fm PN: HP-367186-001 5 Multimedia Using Audio Features The following figure and table describe the audio features of the tablet PC. Component Description 1 Volume mute button Turns off tablet PC sound. 2 Volume down button Decreases tablet PC sound. 3 Volume up button Increases tablet PC sound. 4 Internal microphone Records sound. Hardware and Software Guide 51 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 10, 2004 12:25 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/10/04 File: Chap5.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Multimedia Component Description 5 Audio-out (headphone) jack 6 Audio-in (microphone) jack Produces system sound when connected to optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, headset, or television audio. Connects an optional monaural or stereo microphone. 7 Speaker Produces tablet PC sound. Using the Audio-In (Microphone) Jack The tablet PC is equipped with a stereo microphone jack. When connecting a microphone to the microphone jack, use a microphone with a 3.5-mm plug. If you connect a stereo (dual-channel) microphone, stereo sound will be recorded. If you connect a monaural (single-channel) microphone, left-channel sound will record on both channels. If you connect a dynamic microphone, the recommended sensitivity may not be achieved. When an external microphone is connected to the tablet PC, the tablet PC internal microphone is disabled. Using the Audio-Out (Headphone) Jack WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones or a headset. CAUTION: To prevent possible damage to an external device, do not plug a single sound channel (monaural) connector into the headphone jack. 52 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 10, 2004 12:25 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/10/04 File: Chap5.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Multimedia The stereo (dual-channel) headphone jack is used to connect headphones, and also to connect the audio function of an audio/video device such as a television or VCR. When connecting a device to the headphone jack:

Use only a 3.5-mm stereo plug. For best sound quality, use 24-ohm to 32-ohm headphones. The internal speaker is disabled. Adjusting the Volume To adjust the volume, use any of the following controls:

Tablet PC volume buttons To mute or restore volume, press the volume mute button. You can also mute or restore volume by pressing the volume down and volume up buttons simultaneously. To decrease the volume, press the volume down button. To increase the volume, press the volume up button. Hardware and Software Guide 53 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 10, 2004 12:25 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/10/04 File: Chap5.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Multimedia Windows volume control:

1. Click the Volume icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar). 2. Increase or decrease the volume by moving the slider up or down. (You can also select the check box next to Mute to mute the volume.)

- or -

1. Double-click the Volume icon. 2. In the Volume Control column, increase or decrease the volume by moving the Volume slider up or down. You can also adjust the balance or mute the volume. Volume can also be adjusted within some applications. If the Volume icon is not in the notification area, follow the steps below to place it in the notification area. 1. Select Start > Control Panel > Sounds, Speech, and Audio Devices > Sounds and Audio Devices. 2. Select the Volume tab. 3. Select the check box for Place volume icon in the taskbar. 4. Select Apply. Using Video Features The tablet PC features a 7-pin, dual-purpose S-Video out jack that connects the tablet PC to an optional S-Video device, such as a television, VCR, camcorder, overhead projector, or video capture card, using an optional, standard (4-pin) S-Video cable. The S-Video out jack features 3 extra pins that enable an optional S-Video tocomposite adapter to be used with the tablet PC. 54 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 10, 2004 12:25 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/10/04 File: Chap5.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Multimedia The tablet PC can support one S-Video device connected to the S-Video out jack while simultaneously supporting an image on the tablet PC display and on any other supported external display. The S-Video connection usually provides an image of higher quality than a composite-video connection provides. To transmit video signals through the S-Video out jack, you need an S-Video cable, available from most electronics retailers. If you are combining audio and video functions, such as playing a movie from a DVD in an optional MultiBay drive to a television, you also need a standard audio cable, available from most electronics retailers. Using the S-Video Out Jack To connect a video device to the S-Video out jack:

1. Plug either end of the S-Video cable into the S-Video out jack on the tablet PC. Hardware and Software Guide 55 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 10, 2004 12:25 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/10/04 File: Chap5.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Multimedia 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the video device, as instructed in the documentation included with the device. If the S-Video out jack on the tablet PC is not accessible because the tablet PC is docked into an optional docking device, you can connect the device to the S-Video out jack on the docking device. Connecting a Monitor or Projector To connect an external monitor or projector to the tablet PC, insert the monitor cable into the external monitor port on the back of the tablet PC. If a properly connected external monitor or projector does not display an image, try pressing the fn+f4 hotkey to switch the image to the monitor. You can toggle between displays by pressing the Presentation mode button. 56 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 10, 2004 12:25 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/10/04 File: Chap5.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Using CD and DVD Software Multimedia The following software is supported for use with the tablet PC:

Windows Media PlayerPlays audio CDs and video DVDs and copies audio and data CDs. This software is included with the Windows operating system. InterVideo WinDVDPlays video CDs and DVD movies. This software is preinstalled on select tablet PCs. You can also obtain this software by any of the following methods:

Install WinDVD from the Driver Recovery disk provided with most HP tablet PCs. If you do not have the Driver Recovery disk, refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with your tablet PC to contact Customer Care for a copy of the Restore solution for you tablet PC. Download the software from the HP Web site:

http://www.hp.com InterVideo WinDVD Creator PlusProvides the ability to create, edit and burn movies to a DVD or video CD. This software is located on the InterVideo WinDVD Creator CD, included with select tablet PCs. Sonic RecordNow!Enables you to create copies of data and audio CDs and DVDs and create personalized audio CDs and DVDs. RecordNow! is preinstalled on select tablet PCs. Observing the Copyright Warning It is a criminal offense, under applicable copyright laws, to make unauthorized copies of copyright-protected material, including computer programs, films, broadcasts, and sound recordings. This tablet PC should not be used for such purposes. Hardware and Software Guide 57 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 10, 2004 12:25 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/10/04 File: Chap5.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Multimedia Installing Software To install software from a CD that is included with the tablet PC:

1. Insert an appropriate optical drive into an external MultiBay or MultiBay II. 2. Connect the tablet PC to a reliable AC outlet. 3. Close any open applications. 4. Insert a software CD into the optical drive. If Autorun is enabled, an installation wizard is displayed. If Autorun is disabled, select Start > Run. Enter:

x:\setup.exe

(where x is your CD drive designation), and then select OK. 5. When the installation wizard is displayed, follow the installation instructions on the screen. 6. Restart the tablet PC if prompted. Repeat the installation procedure for all software you want to install. WinDVD Creator has special drive requirements for proper installation. To install WinDVD Creator, refer to the instructions provided with the InterVideo WinDVD Creator CD. 58 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 10, 2004 12:25 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/10/04 File: Chap5.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Multimedia Enabling AutoPlay AutoPlay is an option in Windows that turns the Autorun feature on or off. Autorun starts a program or plays a title on a disc as soon as the disk is inserted into the drive and the drive door is closed. By default, AutoPlay is enabled on the tablet PC. To disable AutoPlay or to enable AutoPlay if the feature has been turned off, refer to your operating system documentation or visit the Microsoft Web site at: http://www.microsoft.com. Installing the Universal Disc Format Reader Some CDs or DVDs created with drag-and-drop software might not initially run in the tablet PC you are using. The first time you insert a CD or DVD formatted for drag-and-drop software into the optical drive, you might be prompted to install the Universal Disk Format (UDF) Reader. Discs formatted for drag-and-drop software or created using drag-and-drop software contain a copy of the UDF Reader. To install the UDF Reader:

1. Insert the CD or DVD created with the drag-and-drop software into the optical drive of the tablet PC. 2. Select Start > Run. Enter:

x:\udfinst.exe

(where x is the CD or DVD drive designation). 3. Select OK. 4. Follow the installation instructions on the screen. Hardware and Software Guide 59 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 10, 2004 12:25 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/10/04 File: Chap5.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Multimedia Using Windows Media Player Windows Media Player is included with the Windows operating system. It can be used to play CDs and DVDs and create audio and data CDs. To play a CD or DVD:

1. Insert the CD or DVD into the optical drive, and then close the tray. 2. Wait several seconds, and then:

If AutoPlay is enabled, Windows Media Player is opened. If Windows Media Player is not opened, select Start >

(All) Programs > Accessories > Entertainment >

Windows Media Player, and then select the Play button to play the disc. For additional instructions on using this application, select Help on the Windows Media Player menu bar. Using WinDVD Player InterVideo WinDVD can be used to play video CDs and DVD movies. To locate and install InterVideo WinDVD, refer to the Installing Software section in this chapter. To open WinDVD when AutoPlay has been disabled, select Start

> (All) Programs > InterVideo WinDVD > InterVideo WinDVD. For more information about using WinDVD, select Help on the WinDVD menu bar. Using WinDVD Creator Plus (Select Models Only) WinDVD Creator Plus can be used to create, edit, and burn movies to a DVD or video CD. This software must be installed from the InterVideo WinDVD Creator CD provided with select tablet PCs. 510 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 10, 2004 12:25 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/10/04 File: Chap5.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Multimedia WinDVD Creator Plus must be installed using a DVD/CD-RW or DVD+RW/R and CD-RW Combo Drive only. If you do not use one of the these drives, WinDVD Creator Plus will not be installed. For more information about WinDVD Creator Plus capabilities and instructions on creating DVDs and Video CDs, refer to the WinDVD Creator Plus online help after installing the software. Using Sonic RecordNow!

Sonic RecordNow! can be used to create backups of data or audio CDs or DVDs, transfer audio files from CDs to a hard drive, and create personalized audio CDs. RecordNow! is preinstalled on your tablet PC. For more information about RecordNow!

capabilities and for instructions on creating data and audio CDs and DVDs, refer to the Sonic RecordNow! Tutorial and online help. Changing DVD Region Settings CAUTION: The region settings on your DVD drive can only be changed 5 times. The region setting you select the fifth time becomes the permanent region setting on the DVD drive. The number of allowable region changes remaining on the drive is displayed in the Remaining Times Until Permanent field in the WinDVD window. The number in the field includes the fifth and permanent change. Most DVDs that contain copyrighted files also contain region codes. The region codes help protect copyrights internationally. You can play a DVD containing a region code only if the region code on the DVD matches the region setting on your DVD drive. If the region code on a DVD does not match the region setting on your drive, a Playback Of Content From This Region Is Not Permitted message is displayed when you insert the DVD. To Hardware and Software Guide 511 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 10, 2004 12:25 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/10/04 File: Chap5.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Multimedia play the DVD, you must change the region setting on your DVD drive. DVD region settings can be changed through the operating system or through some DVD players. Changing Settings Using the Operating System To change settings through the operating system:

1. Open Device Manager by selecting Start > My Computer. Right-click in the window and select Properties > Hardware tab > Device Manager. 2. Select DVD/CD-ROM drives, right-click the DVD drive for which you want to change region settings, and then select Properties. 3. Make the desired changes on the DVD Region tab. 4. Select OK. 5. For additional information, refer to the Windows operating system Help and Support. Changing Settings Using WinDVD To change the region settings on a drive using WinDVD:

1. Open WinDVD through one of the following methods:

Select the WinDVD Player icon on the taskbar. Select Start > (All) Programs > InterVideo WinDVD >

InterVideo WinDVD. 2. Right-click the WinDVD player window. 3. Select Setup. 4. Select the button for the region, and then select your region. 5. Select OK. Changing Settings Using Other DVD Software To change region settings on a drive using a DVD player other then WinDVD, refer to the documentation provided with the player. 512 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 10, 2004 12:25 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap6.fm PN: HP-376186-001 6 Wireless If your notebook is equipped with an integrated wireless device such as 802.11 or Bluetooth wireless devices, you have a wireless notebook. An 802.11 wireless notebook can connect to wireless networks in corporate offices, your home, and public places. Wireless networks include wireless local area networks

(WLANs) or hotspots. Hotspots are wireless access points available in public places, such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. A Bluetooth wireless notebook can connect to other Bluetooth wireless-enabled devices using a wireless personal area network (PAN). Hardware and Software Guide 61 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap6.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Your notebook has a button that may be used to enable and disable the 802.11 and Bluetooth wireless devices and an associated light to indicate the state of the wireless devices. The following illustration shows the wireless button 1 and light 2. In addition to the wireless button and light, your notebook has software controls that enable you to turn on, turn off, enable, and disable your wireless devices. The following table explains the software controls. Wireless Control Wireless Assistant Computer Setup controls Description Is a software utility that enables you to turn on and off the 802.11 and Bluetooth wireless devices individually. For more information on using Wireless Assistant, refer to the Turning On, Turning Off, Enabling and Disabling the 802.11 Wireless and Bluetooth Devices section in this chapter. Enable and disable the 802.11 and Bluetooth wireless devices in Computer Setup. For more information about using Computer Setup to control the 802.11 and Bluetooth wireless devices, refer to Chapter 9, Computer Setup. 62 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap6.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Local Area Network (Select Models Only) Wireless With the 802.11 wireless device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. A large scale WLAN, such as a corporate WLAN or public WLAN hotspot, typically use wireless access points, that can handle a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which enables several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without additional pieces of hardware or software. Wireless access point and wireless router are often used interchangeably. Notebooks with 802.11 WLAN devices may support one or more of three IEEE physical layer standards:

802.11a 802.11b 802.11g There are three popular implementations of WLAN adapters:

802.11b only 802.11b/g 802.11a/b/g 802.11b, the first popular WLAN standard, supports data rates of up to 11 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. 802.11g, which came later, also operates at 2.4 GHz but supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps. An 802.11g WLAN device is backward compatible with 802.11b devices, so they can operate on the same network. 802.11a supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps but operates at a frequency of 5 GHz. 802.11a is not compatible with Hardware and Software Guide 63 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap6.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless 802.11b and 802.11g. For information on identifying the type of device in your notebook, refer to the Identifying a WLAN Device section in this chapter. Connecting Your Wireless Notebook to a Corporate WLAN Contact your network administrator or IT department for information on connecting your notebook to your corporate WLAN. Connecting Your Wireless Notebook to a Public WLAN Contact your ISP or search the Web for a list of public WLANs near you. Web sites that list public WLANs include Cisco Hotspot Locator, Hotspotlist, and Geektools. When you are within range of a public WLAN, a Wireless Network Connection interactive message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Check with each public WLAN location for cost and connection requirements. 64 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap6.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Setting Up a WLAN in Your Home To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet in your home, you need the following equipment. The illustration below shows an example of a completed wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. This wireless network includes An optional broadband modem (either DSL or cable) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) 1. An optional wireless router (purchased separately) 2. Your wireless notebook 3. As this network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. If you need technical assistance to install your WLAN, contact the router manufacturer or your ISP. Hardware and Software Guide 65 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap6.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Using a WLAN Connection To use a WLAN connection:

Verify that all drivers required by the 802.11 wireless device are installed and that the 802.11 wireless device is correctly configured. If you are using an integrated 802.11 wireless device, all required drivers are installed and the adapter is preconfigured and ready for use. If you are using an integrated 802.11 wireless device, verify that the 802.11 wireless device is turned on. When the 802.11 wireless device is turned on, the wireless light is turned on. If the wireless light is off, turn on the 802.11 wireless device. Refer to the Turning On, Turning Off, Enabling and Disabling the 802.11 Wireless and Bluetooth Devices section. For your home WLAN, verify that your router is correctly configured. For instructions, refer to your router documentation. Functional range for subsequent WLAN connections vary, depending on your notebook WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from varying types of walls and other electronic devices. For more information about using a WLAN connection:

Refer to information from your ISP and the documentation included with your wireless router and other WLAN equipment. Access the information and Web site links provided at Start > Help and Support. Refer to the documentation included with your notebook. The Troubleshooting guide on the Notebook Documentation CD contains a section about wireless LAN device problems and resolutions. 66 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap6.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Using Wireless Security Features When you set up your own WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always ensure that security features are protecting the WLAN. If you do not enable security on your WLAN, an unauthorized wireless user can access your notebook data and use your Internet connection without your knowledge. The most common security levels are Wi-Fi Protected Access

(WPA)-Personal and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). In addition to enabling WPA-Personal or WEP security encryption on the router, you may want to use one or more of the following security measures:

Change the default network name (SSID) and password. Use a firewall. Set security on your Web browser. Enable MAC address filtering on the router. For more information about WLAN security, refer to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/wireless for details. Installing Wireless Software (Optional) Microsoft Windows XP supports WLAN configuration with the Zero Client Configuration feature. HP provides a separate WLAN configuration utility that must be installed if you plan to use Cisco Compatible Extensions. Cisco Compatible Extensions enable wireless devices to use Cicso-based WLANs. Hardware and Software Guide 67 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap6.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Identifying a WLAN Device To install HP WLAN software for an integrated 802.11 wireless device, you need to know the name of the integrated 802.11 wireless device on your notebook. To identify an integrated 802.11 wireless device:

1. Display the names of all the 802.11 wireless devices on your notebook:

a. Select Start > My Computer. b. Right-click in the My Computer window. c. Select Properties > Hardware tab > Device Manager >

Network Adapters. 2. Identify the 802.11 wireless device from the list that is displayed:

The listing for an 802.11 wireless device includes the term wireless LAN, WLAN, or 802.11. If no 802.11 wireless device is listed, either your notebook does not have an integrated 802.11 wireless device, or the driver for the 802.11 wireless device is not properly installed. Accessing WLAN Software and Documentation Your WLAN software is preloaded on your notebook and is available in the Software Setup utility. To install the WLAN software:

Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup, and then follow the instructions on the screen. (When you are prompted to select the software you want to install, select or clear the corresponding check boxes.) 68 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap6.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless The WLAN software is also available as a SoftPaq at the HP Web site. To access, download, and install the SoftPaq, use either of the following procedures:

Select Start > Help and Support.

-or-

Visit the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/support:

a. Choose your language and region. b. Select the Download Drivers and Software radio button c. Enter your computer model information, and then follow the instructions provided at the Web site. WLAN software is provided in the Network category. To access model information about your computer, refer to the serial number label. The serial number label is on the bottom of the notebook. To access documentation for your WLAN software:

1. Install the WLAN software as instructed earlier in this chapter. 2. Open the utility. 3. Select Help on the menu bar. Troubleshooting 802.11 Wireless Devices For more troubleshooting information, visit the HP Web site

(http://www.hp.com/go/wireless) or refer to the documentation included with your notebook. The Troubleshooting guide on the Notebook Documentation CD contains a section about wireless LAN device problems and resolutions. Hardware and Software Guide 69 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap6.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Bluetooth (Select Models Only) The Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as Network access points. Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA). Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone). Imaging devices (printer, camera). Audio devices (headset, speakers). The devices are represented in the Bluetooth for Windows software by graphical icons that resemble their physical features, which makes them easily recognizable and distinguishes them from other classes of devices. The Bluetooth for Windows software provides the following functions:

Personal Information Management (PIM) item transferSends and receives information files such as business cards, calendar items, notes, and message items to and from another Bluetooth computer or device. PIM synchronizationSynchronizes PIM data between a computer, PDA, or cell phone using Bluetooth. File TransferSends and receives files to and from another Bluetooth computer. Network access (Personal Area Networking Profile) Enables two or more Bluetooth devices to form an ad-hoc

(peer-to-peer) network. Provides a mechanism that enables a Bluetooth device to access a remote network through a network access point. The network access points can be traditional LAN data access points or group ad-hoc networks that represent a set of devices that are attached only to one another. Dial-up networkingConnects Bluetooth devices to the Internet. 610 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap6.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Bluetooth serial portTransfers data over the Bluetooth link using a virtual COM port. Hands-FreeEnables a vehicle-embedded, hands-free unit or a notebook serving as a hands-free unit to establish a wireless connection to a cellular phone and to act as the Bluetooth cellular phone audio input and output mechanism. Basic imagingProvides a wireless connection between a Bluetooth-enabled camera and other Bluetooth devices. The camera can be controlled remotely by a notebook, and images can be transferred from a camera to be stored on a computer or to be printed. Human interface deviceProvides a wireless connection to other Bluetooth devices, such as keyboards, pointing devices, gaming devices, and remote monitoring devices. FaxProvides a Bluetooth connection that enables a notebook to send or receive a fax message using a Bluetooth cellular phone or modem. HeadsetProvides a wireless connection between a headset and a notebook or cellular phone. The headset acts as the devices audio input and output mechanism and increases mobility. For more information about using Bluetooth with your notebook, refer to the Wireless Documentation CD included with your notebook. Hardware and Software Guide 611 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap6.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Turning On, Turning Off, Enabling and Disabling the 802.11 Wireless and Bluetooth Devices The wireless button 1 enables and disables 802.11 wireless and Bluetooth devices in conjunction with Wireless Assistant. By default, the 802.11 wireless and Bluetooth devices and wireless light 2 are turned on when you turn on the notebook. Turning on a wireless device does not automatically create a WLAN or connect you to a WLAN. For information on setting up a WLAN refer to the Wireless Local Area Network (Select Models Only) section in this chapter. The 802.11 wireless and Bluetooth devices have two power states:

Enabled Disabled 612 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap6.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless You can enable and disable the wireless devices in Computer Setup. For more information about using Computer Setup to control the 802.11 and Bluetooth wireless devices, refer to Chapter 9, Computer Setup. You can also enable and disable the wireless devices with the wireless button. When the wireless devices are enabled in Computer Setup and with the wireless button, you can use Wireless Assistant to turn on and off the devices individually. To view the state of your wireless devices, place the cursor over the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area, or open Wireless Assistant by double-clicking the icon in the notification area. Wireless Assistant displays the status of the devices as on, off, or disabled. Wireless Assistant also displays the status of the devices in Computer Setup as enabled or disabled. For more information about Wireless Assistant:

1. Open Wireless Assistant by double-clicking the icon in the notification area. 2. Select the Help button. You cannot use the wireless button or Wireless Assistant to control the wireless devices if they are disabled in Computer Setup. Hardware and Software Guide 613 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap6.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Turning On the 802.11 Wireless and Bluetooth Devices If And Then Wireless Assistant shows that both WLAN and Bluetooth are off Wireless light is off You want to turn on either or both devices Wireless Assistant shows that both WLAN and Bluetooth are disabled*

Wireless light is off You want to turn on either or both devices Wireless Assistant shows that one device is on and the other device is off Wireless light is on You want to turn on either or both devices 1. Right-click the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 2. Select the device or devices you want to turn on. If the wireless devices are turned off, pressing the wireless button disables both devices. The button does not turn on the devices. 1. Press the wireless button.

(The devices return to their previous on or off state.) 2. If the wireless devices are turned off, right-click the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 3. Select the device or devices you want to turn on. 1. Right-click the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 2. Select the device or devices you want to turn on.

*If the wireless devices are not both on when you disable the devices, pressing the wireless button again returns the devices to their previous on or off state. Pressing the button does not turn on both devices. 614 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap6.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless If you want your wireless devices to be turned on when you turn on your notebook, you must turn them on before you shut down or restart. Turning Off and Disabling the 802.11 Wireless and Bluetooth Devices If And Then Wireless Assistant shows that both WLAN and Bluetooth are on Wireless light is on Wireless Assistant shows that both WLAN and Bluetooth are off Wireless light is off Wireless Assistant shows that one device is on and the other device is off*

Wireless light is on You want to disable both devices You want to turn off either or both devices You want to disable both devices Press the wireless button. 1. Right-click the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 2. Select the device or devices you want to turn off. Press the wireless button. You want to disable both devices You want to turn off both devices. Press the wireless button. 1. Right-click the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 2. Select the device or devices you want to turn off.

*If the wireless devices are not both on when you disable the devices, pressing the wireless button again returns the devices to their previous on or off state. Pressing the button does not turn on both devices. Hardware and Software Guide 615 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap6.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless 616 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:01 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap7.fm PN: HP-367186-001 7 Q Menu Software Q Menu The Q Menu provides quick access to many of the system tasks accessed with the buttons, keys, or hot keys found on most tablet PCs. You can program the Q Menu to access alternative system tasks or to any item on a drive, a network, or the Internet. Identifying Q Menu Controls The jog dial 1 and the Q Menu button 2 are used in Q Menu procedures. Hardware and Software Guide 71 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap7.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Q Menu Software Displaying and Closing the Q Menu The Q Menu can be displayed or closed at any time by using any of the following procedures:

To display the Q Menu, press the Q Menu button or select the Q icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar). If the Q icon is not displayed in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar):

1. Press the Q Menu button. 2. Select Q Menu Settings. 3. Select the Display Q Menu Icon On System Tray check box. 72 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap7.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Q Menu Software 4. Select OK. If the icon is not displayed, select Show Hidden Icons in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar). To close the Q Menu, press the Q Menu button or select anywhere outside of the Q Menu. For information about setting a pen-activated button to open and close the Q Menu, refer to Chapter 4, Pen and Command Controls. Selecting an Item from the Q Menu The items on the Q Menu can be selected with the jog dial, the pen, an external mouse, or the pointing devices. To select an item with the jog dial, rotate the jog dial upward or downward to scroll vertically through the items, then press the jog dial inward to select an item. Obtaining Information About System-Defined Items To display a description of a system-defined Q Menu item or to test any Q Menu item by executing the item command:

1. Press the Q Menu button or select the Q icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar). 2. Select Q Menu Settings. 3. On the Items to Display On Q Menu list:

To display a description of a system-defined item, select the item. (A description is displayed in a panel beneath the list.) User-defined items are not described. To test any item by executing the item command, select the item, and then select Execute. Procedures for using all system-defined items are provided in the Using a System-Defined Item section, later in this chapter. Hardware and Software Guide 73 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap7.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Q Menu Software Setting Q Menu Preferences The Q Menu can display up to 40 items. Several system-defined items are displayed by default. Additional system-defined and user-defined items can be added. All items, including the default items, can be removed. The items on the Q Menu are managed from the Items to Display On Q Menu list. Accessing the Items to Display on Q Menu List The Items to Display on Q Menu list can be accessed at any time by using either of the following procedures:

Press the Q Menu button or select the Q icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar), and then select Q Menu Settings. Select Start > Control Panel > Other Control Panel Options > Q Menu Settings. Removing a Q Menu Item To remove an item from the Q Menu:

1. Press the Q Menu button or select the Q icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar). 2. Select Q Menu Settings. 3. On the Items to Display On Q Menu list, clear the check box for the item you want to remove. 4. Select Apply > OK. 74 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap7.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Adding a Q Menu Item Q Menu Software An item must be displayed on the Items to Display On Q Menu list before it can be added to the Q Menu. The Q Menu and the Items to Display on Q Menu list can include no more than 40 items. If the list currently contains 40 items, the Add button is dimmed and unavailable. If the Add button is unavailable, you must remove a listed item before you can add the new item. Adding a Listed Item to the Q Menu To add an item from the Items to Display On Q Menu list to the Q Menu:

1. Press the Q Menu button or select the Q icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar). 2. Select Q Menu Settings. 3. Select the check box for the item you want to add. 4. Select OK. To display the Q Menu after adding the item, press the Q Menu button or select the Q icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar). Adding an Unlisted Item to the Q Menu To add an item that is not on the Items to Display on Q Menu listfor example, an item on a drive, network, or the Internetto both the Items to Display on Q Menu list and to the Q Menu:

1. Press the Q Menu button or select the Q icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar). 2. Select Q Menu Settings. 3. Select Add. Hardware and Software Guide 75 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap7.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Q Menu Software 4. In the Add New Menu Entry window, you can add the item by typing or by browsing:

To add the item using the keyboard, type a name for the item in the Display Name field and type the path to the item in the File Name field. If you prefer to type the Display Name, but browse for the File Name, leave the File Name field blank. To add an item by browsing, select the Browse button next to the File Name field. In the window, select the item. (The full name of the item is displayed in the File Name field and, if you did not type a name earlier in the Display Name field, a Display Name is generated from the item name and displayed in the Display Name field.) 5. To confirm your preference(s), select Apply > OK. 6. To close the Q Menu window, select OK. To display the Q Menu after adding the item, press the Q Menu button or select the Q icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar). Changing a User-Defined Item User-defined items can be changed, but system-defined items cannot be changed. If you select a system-defined item on the Items To Display on Q Menu list, the Modify button is unavailable. To change the Display Name and/or File Name of a user-defined item:

1. Press the Q Menu button or select the Q icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar). 2. Select Q Menu Settings. 3. Select the item on the Items To Display On Q Menu list. 76 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap7.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Q Menu Software 4. Select Modify. To change the Display Name or File Name of the item using the keyboard, type the new name for the item in the Display Name field or type the new path to the item in the File Name field. If you prefer to type the Display Name, but browse for the File Name, leave the File Name field blank. To change the Display Name or File Name by browsing, select the Browse button beside the File Name field. In the window, select the item. (The full name of the item is displayed in the File Name field and, if you did not type a name earlier in the Display Name field, a Display Name is generated from the item name and displayed in the Display Name field.) 5. To confirm your preference(s), select Apply > OK. 6. To close the Q Menu window, select OK. To display the Q Menu after changing a Display and/or File Name, press the Q Menu button or select the Q icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar). Repositioning a Q Menu Item To change the location of an item on the Q Menu:

1. Press the Q Menu button or select the Q icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar). 2. Select Q Menu Settings. 3. Select the item on the Items to Display On Q Menu list, then:

To move the item upward, select the Move Up button. To move the item downward, select the Move Down button. 4. To confirm your preference(s) and close the Q Menu window, select Apply > OK. Hardware and Software Guide 77 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap7.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Q Menu Software Removing an Item from the Items to Display on Q Menu List System-defined items cannot be removed from the Items to Display on Q Menu List. To remove a user-defined item:

1. Press the Q Menu button or select the Q icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar). 2. Select Q Menu Settings. 3. Select the item you want to remove. 4. Select Remove. 5. To confirm your preference(s) and close the Q Menu window, select Apply > OK. Enabling Automatic Mode Change Enabling automatic mode change allows the Q Menu software to adjust the display orientation automatically. If you disable this option, the orientation of the display will need to be manually changed. To enable automatic mode change:

1. Press the Q Menu button or select the Q icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar). 2. Select Q Menu Settings. 3. Select the Enable Automatic Mode Change check box. Allowing All Users to Configure Q Menu This option allows all user accounts to reconfigure Q Menu. When selected, this change is only applied to that user. To enable automatic mode change:

1. Press the Q Menu button or select the Q icon in the notification area (at the far right of the taskbar). 2. Select Q Menu Settings. 3. Select the Allow All Users to Configure Q Menu check box. 78 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap7.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Q Menu Software Using a System-Defined Item As shipped, the Q Menu displays only the items identified below as default. All the items described below can be added or removed from the Q Menu. For instructions, refer to Setting Q Menu Preferences, earlier in this chapter. Brightness (Default) Select Brightness to display a pop-up window that enables you to adjust screen brightness with the jog dial. After selecting your preferences, select OK in the pop-up window. Volume (Default) Select Volume to display the operating system volume control window. Mute On/Off (Default) If system volume is on, select Mute On/Off to mute system volume. If system volume is muted, select Mute On/Off to restore system volume. Capture Screen Select Capture Screen to copy the image currently displayed on the tablet PC screen to the Windows clipboard. To save or print the image, open an application which supports a screen image, such as Microsoft Word or Microsoft Paint, then paste the image. For example, to copy the screen image into a Word document:

1. Select Capture Screen. 2. Open Word. 3. Place the pointer in the document where you want to paste the image. 4. On the Word menu bar, select Edit > Paste. Hardware and Software Guide 79 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap7.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Q Menu Software Capture Window Select Capture Window to copy the image of the currently active window on the tablet PC screen to the Windows clipboard. To save or print the image, open an application which supports a screen image, such as Microsoft Word or Microsoft Paint, then paste the image. For example, to copy the an image of the currently active window into a Word document:

1. Select Capture Window. 2. Open Word. 3. Place the pointer in the document where you want to paste the image. 4. On the Word menu bar, select Edit > Paste. Tablet Display (Default) When an optional display device, such as an external monitor or projector, is connected to the external monitor connector on the tablet PC:

To display the image only on the tablet PC:

Select Tablet Display. Selecting Tablet Display turns off the Extended Desktop option. 710 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap7.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Q Menu Software External Display When an optional display device, such as an external monitor or projector, is connected to the external monitor connector on the tablet PC:

To display the image only on the display device:

Select External Display. Selecting External Display turns off the Extended Desktop option. Dual Display (Default) When an optional display device, such as an external monitor or projector, is connected to the external monitor connector on the tablet PC:

To display the image on the tablet PC and the display device:

Select Dual Display. Selecting Dual Display turns off the Extended Desktop option. Extended Desktop The Extended Desktop option extends the display from the tablet PC screen onto the external monitor screen. For example, you could use the Extended Desktop item to display an entire spreadsheet. The left side columns could be displayed on the tablet PC screen and the right side columns could be displayed on the external monitor. When an optional external monitor is connected to the external monitor connector on the tablet PC:

To turn on the Extended Desktop option:

Select Extended Desktop. To turn off the Extended Desktop option:

1. Press the Q Menu button. 2. Select Tablet Display, External Display, or Dual Display. Hardware and Software Guide 711 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap7.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Q Menu Software Presentation Mode On/Off (Default) CAUTION: Presentation mode is integrated with the Q Menu software. If the Q Menu software is uninstalled or disabled, presentation mode will not function. Presentation mode is a desktop profile that provides the optimal configuration for displaying a presentation, such as a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation, on a projector or external monitor while displaying speakers notes on the tablet PC. If you cause the system to initiate a desktop video profile while presentation mode is appliedfor example, by docking or undockingyou must reapply presentation mode. To apply or reapply presentation mode:

Select Presentation Mode On. To close presentation mode and return the system to the previous desktop video profile:

Select Presentation Mode Off. Portrait-Primary (Default) To switch the image clockwise to portrait view from landscape view:

Select Portrait-Primary. Landscape-Primary (Default) To switch the image clockwise to landscape view from portrait view:

Select Landscape-Primary. 712 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap7.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Q Menu Software Portrait-Secondary To switch the image counterclockwise to portrait view from landscape view:

Select Portrait-Secondary. The default Portrait-Primary item switches the image clockwise to portrait view. Left-handed users may find the Portrait-Secondary item, which switches the image counterclockwise to portrait view, more convenient. HP recommends that you not use the Portrait-Secondary view while using the internal wireless. The positions commonly occupied by the tablet PC, external devices, and the user while the tablet PC is in the Portrait-Secondary view may obstruct the antennas. For exact antenna locations, refer to Chapter 1, Tablet PC Features. Landscape-Secondary To switch the image counterclockwise to landscape view from portrait view:

Select Landscape-Secondary. The default Landscape-Primary item switches the image clockwise to landscape view. Left-handed users may prefer to use the Landscape-Secondary item, which switches the image counterclockwise to landscape view. HP recommends that you not use the Landscape-Secondary view while using the internal wireless. The positions commonly occupied by the tablet PC, external devices, and the user while the tablet PC is in the Landscape-Secondary view may obstruct the antennas. For exact antenna locations, refer to Chapter 1, Tablet PC Features. Hardware and Software Guide 713 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap7.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Q Menu Software Standby To initiate Standby:

Select Standby. Hibernate To initiate Hibernation if Hibernation is enabled:

Select Hibernate. Hibernation is enabled by default. If Hibernation is not enabled, selecting Hibernate initiates Standby. To verify that Hibernation is enabled:

Select Start > Control Panel > Performance and Maintenance > Power Options > Hibernate tab. If Hibernation is enabled, the Enable Hibernation check box is selected. Shut Down To immediately close the operating system and shut down the system:

Select Shut Down. You are not prompted to confirm this action. Power Controls To open the operating system Power Options Properties window:

Select Power Controls. Tablet PC Settings (Default) To open the operating system Tablet and Pen Settings window:

Select Tablet PC Settings. 714 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap7.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Q Menu Software Q Menu Settings (Default) To open the Q Menu Settings window:

Select Q Menu Settings. Tablet PC Button Driver The tablet PC button driver allows you to customize the pen-activated buttons and jog dial. You can program the buttons to perform various functions or open specific programs. Each button can be programmed to perform a different function for each orientation, or to perform the same function for all orientations. To customize a tablet PC button:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and other Hardware > Tablet and Pen Settings. 2. Select the Tablet Buttons tab. 3. Select the orientation for which you want to program the button. 4. Select the button you want to program in the Tablet Button column. The button is displayed in the Button location and Detailed view areas of the Tablet Buttons tab. 5. To change the action associated with the button, select Change. The Change Tablet Button Actions dialog box is displayed. 6. In the Action drop-down box, select the action that you want the button to perform. 7. Select OK. 8. Select Apply > OK on the Tablet and Pen settings dialog box. CAUTION: The tablet PC button driver is integrated with the Q Menu software. If the Q Menu software is uninstalled or disabled, the button driver will not function. Hardware and Software Guide 715 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap7.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Q Menu Software 716 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap8.fm PN: HP-376186-001 8 Wireless If your tablet PC is equipped with an integrated wireless device such as 802.11 or Bluetooth wireless devices, you have a wireless tablet PC. An 802.11 wireless tablet PC can connect to wireless networks in corporate offices, your home, and public places. Wireless networks include wireless local area networks

(WLANs) or hotspots. Hotspots are wireless access points available in public places, such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. A Bluetooth wireless tablet PC can connect to other Bluetooth wireless-enabled devices using a wireless personal area network (PAN). Hardware and Software Guide 81 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap8.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Your tablet PC has a button that may be used to enable and disable the 802.11 and Bluetooth wireless devices and an associated light to indicate the state of the wireless devices. The following illustration shows the wireless button 1 and light 2. In addition to the wireless button and light, your tablet PC has software controls that enable you to turn on, turn off, enable, and disable your wireless devices. The following table explains the software controls. Wireless Control Wireless Assistant Computer Setup controls Description Is a software utility that enables you to turn on and off the 802.11 and Bluetooth wireless devices individually. For more information on using Wireless Assistant, refer to the Turning On, Turning Off, Enabling and Disabling the 802.11 Wireless and Bluetooth Devices section in this chapter. Enable and disable the 802.11 and Bluetooth wireless devices in Computer Setup. For more information about using Computer Setup to control the 802.11 and Bluetooth wireless devices, refer to Chapter 11, Computer Setup. 82 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap8.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Local Area Network (Select Models Only) Wireless With the 802.11 wireless device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. A large scale WLAN, such as a corporate WLAN or public WLAN hotspot, typically use wireless access points, that can handle a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which enables several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without additional pieces of hardware or software. Wireless access point and wireless router are often used interchangeably. Tablet PCs with 802.11 WLAN devices may support one or more of three IEEE physical layer standards:

802.11a 802.11b 802.11g There are three popular implementations of WLAN adapters:

802.11b only 802.11b/g 802.11a/b/g 802.11b, the first popular WLAN standard, supports data rates of up to 11 Mbps and operates at a frequency of 2.4 GHz. 802.11g, which came later, also operates at 2.4 GHz but supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps. An 802.11g WLAN device is backward compatible with 802.11b devices, so they can operate on the same network. 802.11a supports data rates of up to 54 Mbps but operates at a frequency of 5 GHz. 802.11a is not compatible with Hardware and Software Guide 83 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap8.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless 802.11b and 802.11g. For information on identifying the type of device in your tablet PC, refer to the Identifying a WLAN Device section in this chapter. Connecting Your Wireless Tablet PC to a Corporate WLAN Contact your network administrator or IT department for information on connecting your tablet PC to your corporate WLAN. Connecting Your Wireless Tablet PC to a Public WLAN Contact your ISP or search the Web for a list of public WLANs near you. Web sites that list public WLANs include Cisco Hotspot Locator, Hotspotlist, and Geektools. When you are within range of a public WLAN, a Wireless Network Connection interactive message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Check with each public WLAN location for cost and connection requirements. 84 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap8.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Setting Up a WLAN in Your Home To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet in your home, you need the following equipment. The illustration below shows an example of a completed wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. This wireless network includes An optional broadband modem (either DSL or cable) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider (ISP) 1. An optional wireless router (purchased separately) 2. Your wireless tablet PC 3. As this network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. If you need technical assistance to install your WLAN, contact the router manufacturer or your ISP. Hardware and Software Guide 85 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap8.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Using a WLAN Connection To use a WLAN connection:

Verify that all drivers required by the 802.11 wireless device are installed and that the 802.11 wireless device is correctly configured. If you are using an integrated 802.11 wireless device, all required drivers are installed and the adapter is preconfigured and ready for use. If you are using an integrated 802.11 wireless device, verify that the 802.11 wireless device is turned on. When the 802.11 wireless device is turned on, the wireless light is turned on. If the wireless light is off, turn on the 802.11 wireless device. Refer to the Turning On, Turning Off, Enabling and Disabling the 802.11 Wireless and Bluetooth Devices section. For your home WLAN, verify that your router is correctly configured. For instructions, refer to your router documentation. Functional range for subsequent WLAN connections vary, depending on your tablet PC WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from varying types of walls and other electronic devices. For more information about using a WLAN connection:

Refer to information from your ISP and the documentation included with your wireless router and other WLAN equipment. Access the information and Web site links provided at Start > Help and Support. Refer to the documentation included with your tablet PC. The Troubleshooting guide on the Tablet PC Documentation CD contains a section about wireless LAN device problems and resolutions. 86 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap8.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Using Wireless Security Features When you set up your own WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always ensure that security features are protecting the WLAN. If you do not enable security on your WLAN, an unauthorized wireless user can access your tablet PC data and use your Internet connection without your knowledge. The most common security levels are Wi-Fi Protected Access

(WPA)-Personal and Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). In addition to enabling WPA-Personal or WEP security encryption on the router, you may want to use one or more of the following security measures:

Change the default network name (SSID) and password. Use a firewall. Set security on your Web browser. Enable MAC address filtering on the router. For more information about WLAN security, refer to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/wireless for details. Installing Wireless Software (Optional) Microsoft Windows XP supports WLAN configuration with the Zero Client Configuration feature. HP provides a separate WLAN configuration utility that must be installed if you plan to use Cisco Compatible Extensions. Cisco Compatible Extensions enable wireless devices to use Cicso-based WLANs. Hardware and Software Guide 87 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap8.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Identifying a WLAN Device To install HP WLAN software for an integrated 802.11 wireless device, you need to know the name of the integrated 802.11 wireless device on your tablet PC. To identify an integrated 802.11 wireless device:

1. Display the names of all the 802.11 wireless devices on your tablet PC:

a. Select Start > My Computer. b. Right-click in the My Computer window. c. Select Properties > Hardware tab > Device Manager >

Network Adapters. 2. Identify the 802.11 wireless device from the list that is displayed:

The listing for an 802.11 wireless device includes the term wireless LAN, WLAN, or 802.11. If no 802.11 wireless device is listed, either your tablet PC does not have an integrated 802.11 wireless device, or the driver for the 802.11 wireless device is not properly installed. Accessing WLAN Software and Documentation Your WLAN software is preloaded on your tablet PC and is available in the Software Setup utility. To install the WLAN software:

Select Start > All Programs > Software Setup, and then follow the instructions on the screen. (When you are prompted to select the software you want to install, select or clear the corresponding check boxes.) 88 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap8.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless The WLAN software is also available as a SoftPaq at the HP Web site. To access, download, and install the SoftPaq, use either of the following procedures:

Select Start > Help and Support.

-or-

Visit the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/support:

a. Choose your language and region. b. Select the Download Drivers and Software radio button c. Enter your computer model information, and then follow the instructions provided at the Web site. WLAN software is provided in the Network category. To access model information about your computer, refer to the serial number label. The serial number label is on the bottom of the tablet PC. To access documentation for your WLAN software:

1. Install the WLAN software as instructed earlier in this chapter. 2. Open the utility. 3. Select Help on the menu bar. Troubleshooting 802.11 Wireless Devices For more troubleshooting information, visit the HP Web site

(http://www.hp.com/go/wireless) or refer to the documentation included with your tablet PC. The Troubleshooting guide on the Tablet PC Documentation CD contains a section about wireless LAN device problems and resolutions. Hardware and Software Guide 89 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap8.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Bluetooth (Select Models Only) The Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as Network access points. Computers (desktop, tablet PC, PDA). Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone). Imaging devices (printer, camera). Audio devices (headset, speakers). The devices are represented in the Bluetooth for Windows software by graphical icons that resemble their physical features, which makes them easily recognizable and distinguishes them from other classes of devices. The Bluetooth for Windows software provides the following functions:

Personal Information Management (PIM) item transferSends and receives information files such as business cards, calendar items, notes, and message items to and from another Bluetooth computer or device. PIM synchronizationSynchronizes PIM data between a computer, PDA, or cell phone using Bluetooth. File TransferSends and receives files to and from another Bluetooth computer. Network access (Personal Area Networking Profile) Enables two or more Bluetooth devices to form an ad-hoc

(peer-to-peer) network. Provides a mechanism that enables a Bluetooth device to access a remote network through a network access point. The network access points can be traditional LAN data access points or group ad-hoc networks that represent a set of devices that are attached only to one another. Dial-up networkingConnects Bluetooth devices to the Internet. 810 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap8.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Bluetooth serial portTransfers data over the Bluetooth link using a virtual COM port. Hands-FreeEnables a vehicle-embedded, hands-free unit or a tablet PC serving as a hands-free unit to establish a wireless connection to a cellular phone and to act as the Bluetooth cellular phone audio input and output mechanism. Basic imagingProvides a wireless connection between a Bluetooth-enabled camera and other Bluetooth devices. The camera can be controlled remotely by a tablet PC, and images can be transferred from a camera to be stored on a computer or to be printed. Human interface deviceProvides a wireless connection to other Bluetooth devices, such as keyboards, pointing devices, gaming devices, and remote monitoring devices. FaxProvides a Bluetooth connection that enables a tablet PC to send or receive a fax message using a Bluetooth cellular phone or modem. HeadsetProvides a wireless connection between a headset and a tablet PC or cellular phone. The headset acts as the devices audio input and output mechanism and increases mobility. For more information about using Bluetooth with your tablet PC, refer to the Wireless Documentation CD included with your tablet PC. Hardware and Software Guide 811 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap8.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Turning On, Turning Off, Enabling and Disabling the 802.11 Wireless and Bluetooth Devices The wireless button 1 enables and disables 802.11 wireless and Bluetooth devices in conjunction with Wireless Assistant. By default, the 802.11 wireless and Bluetooth devices and wireless light 2 are turned on when you turn on the tablet PC. Turning on a wireless device does not automatically create a WLAN or connect you to a WLAN. For information on setting up a WLAN refer to the Wireless Local Area Network (Select Models Only) section in this chapter. The 802.11 wireless and Bluetooth devices have two power states:

Enabled Disabled 812 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap8.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless You can enable and disable the wireless devices in Computer Setup. For more information about using Computer Setup to control the 802.11 and Bluetooth wireless devices, refer to Chapter 11, Computer Setup. You can also enable and disable the wireless devices with the wireless button. When the wireless devices are enabled in Computer Setup and with the wireless button, you can use Wireless Assistant to turn on and off the devices individually. To view the state of your wireless devices, place the cursor over the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area, or open Wireless Assistant by double-clicking the icon in the notification area. Wireless Assistant displays the status of the devices as on, off, or disabled. Wireless Assistant also displays the status of the devices in Computer Setup as enabled or disabled. For more information about Wireless Assistant:

1. Open Wireless Assistant by double-clicking the icon in the notification area. 2. Select the Help button. You cannot use the wireless button or Wireless Assistant to control the wireless devices if they are disabled in Computer Setup. Hardware and Software Guide 813 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap8.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless Turning On the 802.11 Wireless and Bluetooth Devices If And Then Wireless Assistant shows that both WLAN and Bluetooth are off Wireless light is off You want to turn on either or both devices Wireless Assistant shows that both WLAN and Bluetooth are disabled*

Wireless light is off You want to turn on either or both devices Wireless Assistant shows that one device is on and the other device is off Wireless light is on You want to turn on either or both devices 1. Right-click the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 2. Select the device or devices you want to turn on. If the wireless devices are turned off, pressing the wireless button disables both devices. The button does not turn on the devices. 1. Press the wireless button.

(The devices return to their previous on or off state.) 2. If the wireless devices are turned off, right-click the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 3. Select the device or devices you want to turn on. 1. Right-click the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 2. Select the device or devices you want to turn on.

*If the wireless devices are not both on when you disable the devices, pressing the wireless button again returns the devices to their previous on or off state. Pressing the button does not turn on both devices. 814 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap8.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless If you want your wireless devices to be turned on when you turn on your tablet PC, you must turn them on before you shut down or restart. Turning Off and Disabling the 802.11 Wireless and Bluetooth Devices If And Then Wireless Assistant shows that both WLAN and Bluetooth are on Wireless light is on Wireless Assistant shows that both WLAN and Bluetooth are off Wireless light is off Wireless Assistant shows that one device is on and the other device is off*

Wireless light is on You want to disable both devices You want to turn off either or both devices You want to disable both devices Press the wireless button. 1. Right-click the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 2. Select the device or devices you want to turn off. Press the wireless button. You want to disable both devices You want to turn off both devices. Press the wireless button. 1. Right-click the Wireless Assistant icon in the notification area. 2. Select the device or devices you want to turn off.

*If the wireless devices are not both on when you disable the devices, pressing the wireless button again returns the devices to their previous on or off state. Pressing the button does not turn on both devices. Hardware and Software Guide 815 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap8.fm PN: HP-376186-001 Wireless 816 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 9 Security Security Features Quick Reference Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. In addition to the Windows operating system security measures, the tablet PC provides the following security features, most of which can be configured in Computer Setup. For more information, refer to Chapter 11, Computer Setup in this guide. To Protect Against Use This Security Feature Unauthorized use of the tablet PC Power-on password Unauthorized access to the Computer Setup utility (f10) HP administrator password Unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive DriveLock Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Optional smart cards An enabled smart card can store the Windows user and Windows administrator passwords; therefore, both the smart card and the smart card PIN are required to access the account. This security feature is supported by only certain smart card readers. Hardware and Software Guide 91 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security To Protect Against Use This Security Feature Unauthorized access of data Windows Firewall software Unauthorized access to the BIOS settings and other system identification information HP administrator password, which protects the system information in Computer Setup. Unauthorized removal of the tablet PC Security cable slot (used with an optional security cable) For more information on the security cable slot, refer to the Connecting an Optional Security Cable section in this chapter. Setting Security Preferences in Computer Setup Most security preferences are set in Computer Setup. Because Computer Setup is a non-Windows utility, it does not support the pointing devices on your tablet PC. When using Computer Setup, you must use the keys on your tablet PC to navigate and make selections. For more details, refer to Chapter 11, Computer Setup. 92 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security Using Passwords CAUTION: If you forget both your DriveLock user and DriveLock master passwords, the hard drive is permanently locked and can no longer be used. Most security features use passwords. Whenever you set a password, write down the password and store it in a secure location away from the tablet PC. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot start up the tablet PC or restore from Hibernation until a service partner resets the tablet PC. To contact a service partner, refer to the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the tablet PC. If you forget your HP administrator password, you will not be able to access Computer Setup. If you forget the DriveLock user password but know your DriveLock master password, you can remove DriveLock protection from the drive. For instructions, refer to the Using DriveLock section in this chapter. Hardware and Software Guide 93 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security HP and Windows Passwords HP security features and Windows operating system security features work independently from one another. For example, a device disabled in Computer Setup cannot be enabled in Windows. HP passwords and Windows passwords are also independent of one another. The following table lists the different passwords used by HP and Windows and describes their functions. HP Passwords*

Function HP administrator password Used to access Computer Setup. Power-on password DriveLock user password DriveLock master password Smart card PIN Used to access the tablet PC during Startup and when you restart the tablet PC. Used by the day-to-day user to access drives protected by DriveLock at startup. Used by the HP administrator to access drives protected by DriveLock and to remove DriveLock protection from the drive. Stores the Windows administrator and user passwords and is used to access Windows during startup on tablet PCs. Power-on and HP administrator passwords can be stored on smart cards if an optional smart card reader supports this functionality.

*HP passwords must be enabled in Computer Setup. For more information, refer to Chapter 11, Computer Setup. 94 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security Windows Passwords Administrator password User password Used to log on to the tablet as the Windows administrator after Windows has been configured to prompt for a password at startup. Used to log on to the tablet PC as a user after Windows has been configured to prompt for a password at startup. HP and Windows Password Guidelines HP and Windows passwords are not interchangeable. You must use an HP password at an HP password prompt and a Windows password at a Windows password prompt. For example:

If a power-on password is set, the power-on password (not a Windows password) must be entered when the tablet PC starts up or restores from Hibernation. If you set Windows to prompt for a password before resuming from Standby, a Windows password (not a power-on password) must be entered to resume from Standby. The same word or series of letters or numbers used for an HP password can be used for another HP password or for a Windows password, with these considerations:

HP passwords can be any combination of up to 32 letters and numbers and are not case sensitive. An HP password must be set and entered with the same type of keys. For example, an HP password set with keyboard number keys will not be recognized if it is entered with embedded numeric keypad number keys. For information about the embedded numeric keypad, refer to the Keypads section in Chapter 3, Pointing Devices and Keyboard. Hardware and Software Guide 95 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security Using Power-On Passwords A power-on password prevents unauthorized use of the tablet PC. After it is set, a power-on password must be entered each time the tablet PC is turned on or restarted. A power-on password:

Does not display as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. Must be set and entered with the same keys. For example, a power-on password set with keyboard number keys will not be recognized if you enter it with keypad number keys. Can include any combination of up to 32 letters and numbers and is not case sensitive. Setting Power-On Passwords A power-on password is set, changed, or deleted in Computer Setup. To manage the password:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the tablet PC. Press f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. To change the language, press f2. For navigation instructions, press f1. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Power-On password, and then press enter. To set a power-on password, type the password in the New Password and Verify New Password fields, and then press f10. To change a power-on password, type the current password in the Old Password field, type the new password in the New Password and Verify New Password fields, and then press f10. To delete a power-on password, type the current password in the Old Password field, and then press f10. 96 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security 3. To save your preferences, use the arrow keys to select File >

Save Changes and Exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences are set when you exit Computer Setup and take effect when the tablet PC restarts. Entering Power-On Passwords At the power-on password prompt, type your password, and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the password, you must restart the tablet PC and try again. Requiring a Power-On Password at Restart You can require that a power-on password be entered each time the tablet PC is restarted. Enable and disable this feature in Computer Setup. 1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the tablet PC. Press f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. To change the language, press f2. For navigation instructions, press f1. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Password options >

Require password on restart. 3. Toggle the field to enable or disable, and then press enter. 4. Save your preferences by using the arrow keys to select File >

Save Changes and Exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences are set when you exit Computer Setup and take effect when the tablet PC restarts. Hardware and Software Guide 97 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security Using HP Administrator Passwords The HP administrator password protects the configuration settings and system identification information in Computer Setup. After it is set, this password must be entered to access Computer Setup. The HP administrator password Is not interchangeable with a Windows administrator password, although both can use the same word or series of letters, or numbers. Does not display as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. Must be set and entered with the same keys. For example, an HP administrator password set with keyboard number keys will not be recognized if you enter it with embedded numeric keypad number keys. Can include any combination of up to 32 letters and numbers and is not case sensitive. Setting HP Administrator Passwords An HP administrator password is set, changed, or deleted in Computer Setup. To manage the password:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the tablet PC. Press f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. To change the language, press f2. For navigation instructions, press f1. 2. Use the arrow keys to select the Security menu >

Administrator Password, and then press enter. To set an HP administrator password, type your password in the New Password and Verify New Password fields, and then press f10. 98 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security To change an HP administrator password, type your current password in the Old Password field, type the new password in the New Password and Verify New Password fields, and then press f10. To delete an HP administrator password, type your current password in the Old Password field, and then press f10. 3. To save your preferences and exit Computer Setup, use the arrow keys to select File > Save Changes and Exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences are set when you exit Computer Setup and take effect when the tablet PC restarts. Entering HP Administrator Passwords At the Computer Setup prompt, type your Administrator Password (using the same type of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the HP administrator password, you must restart the tablet PC and try again. Using DriveLock CAUTION: If you forget the DriveLock user and DriveLock master passwords, the hard drive is permanently unusable. DriveLock prevents unauthorized access to the contents of a hard drive. After DriveLock protection is applied to a drive, a password must be entered to access the drive. The drive must be inserted into the tablet PC, not an optional docking device (select models only) or external MultiBay, in order for it to be accessed by the DriveLock passwords. Hardware and Software Guide 99 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security DriveLock involves a user password and a master password:

A hard drive protected by DriveLock can be accessed with either the user password or the master password. You can delete a user password or master password only by removing DriveLock protection from the drive. DriveLock protection can be removed from the drive only with the master password. The owner of the user password should be the day-to-day user of the protected hard drive. The owner of the master password may be a system administrator or the day-to-day user. A user password and a master password can be the same word. When you start the tablet PC from a hard drive protected with DriveLock, and your power-on and DriveLock passwords are identical, you will be prompted to enter only a power-on password instead of both a power-on and a DriveLock password. Setting DriveLock Passwords CAUTION: If you forget the DriveLock user and the DriveLock master passwords, the hard drive is permanently unusable. CAUTION: To prevent system lockup and loss of information:

Shut down the tablet PC before removing the hard drive from the hard drive bay. Do not remove the hard drive while the tablet PC is on, in Standby, or in Hibernation. If you are not sure whether the tablet PC is off or in Hibernation, turn the tablet PC on by pressing the power/standby switch to the left or right. Then shut down the tablet PC through the operating system. 910 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 To access the DriveLock settings in Computer Setup:

Security 1. Shut down the tablet PC. If you are not sure whether the tablet PC is off or in Hibernation, turn the tablet PC on by pressing the power/standby switch to the left or right, and then shut down the tablet PC through the operating system. 2. Insert the hard drive into the tablet PC (not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay). 3. Open Computer Setup by turning on (not restarting) the tablet PC. Press f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. To change the language, press f2. For navigation instructions, press f1. 4. Use the arrow keys to select the Security menu > DriveLock passwords. Then press enter. 5. Select the location of the hard drive, and then press f10. 6. Toggle the Protection field to Enable. 7. Read the warning. To continue, press f10. 8. Type your user password in the New Password and Verify New Password fields, and then press f10. 9. Type your master password in the New Password and Verify New Password fields, and then press f10. 10. To confirm DriveLock protection on the drive you have selected, type DriveLock in the confirmation field, and then press f10. 11. To save your DriveLock settings, select File > Save Changes and Exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences are set when you exit Computer Setup and take effect when the tablet PC restarts. Hardware and Software Guide 911 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security Entering DriveLock Passwords 1. Be sure that the drive is inserted into the tablet PC (not an optional docking device or external MultiBay). 2. When prompted for a DriveLock password, type your user or master password (using the same type of keys you used to set the password), and then press enter. 3. After 2 incorrect attempts to enter the password, you must restart the tablet PC and try again. Requiring a Drivelock Password at Restart You can require that a DriveLock password be entered each time the tablet PC is restarted. Enable and disable this feature in Computer Setup. 1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the tablet PC. Press f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. To change the language, press f2. For navigation instructions, press f1. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security > Password options >

Require password on restart. 3. Toggle the field to enable or disable, and then press enter. 4. Save your preferences by using the arrow keys to select File >

Save Changes and Exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences are set when you exit Computer Setup and take effect when the tablet PC restarts. 912 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security Changing DriveLock Passwords CAUTION: To prevent loss of work and damage to the tablet PC and the hard drive, shut down the tablet PC before inserting or removing a hard drive. (The hard drive is any hard drive used in the hard drive bay.) To access the DriveLock settings in Computer Setup:

1. Shut down the tablet PC. If you are not sure whether the tablet PC is off or in Hibernation, turn the tablet PC on by pressing the power/standby switch to the left or right, and then shut down the tablet PC through the operating system. 2. Be sure that the hard drive is inserted into the tablet PC (not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay). 3. Open Computer Setup by turning on (not restarting) the tablet PC. Press f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower left of the screen. To change the language, press f2. For navigation instructions, press f1. 4. Use the arrow keys to select the Security menu > DriveLock passwords, and then press enter. 5. Use the arrow keys to select the location of the hard drive, and then press f10. 6. Use the arrow keys to select the field for the password you want to change, type your current password in the Old Password field, type the new password in the New Password and in the Verify New Password fields. Then press f10. 7. To save your preferences, use arrow keys to select File >

Save Changes and Exit, and then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences are set when you exit Computer Setup and take effect when the tablet PC restarts. Hardware and Software Guide 913 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security Removing DriveLock Protection To access the DriveLock settings in Computer Setup:

1. Shut down the tablet PC. If you are not sure whether the tablet PC is off or in Hibernation, turn the tablet PC on by pressing the power/standby switch to the left or right, and then shut down the tablet PC through the operating system. 2. Be sure that the hard drive is inserted into the tablet PC (not into an optional docking device or external MultiBay). 3. Open Computer Setup by turning on (not restarting) the tablet PC. Press f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. To change the language, press f2. For navigation instructions, press f1. 4. Use the arrow keys to select the Security menu > DriveLock passwords, and then press enter. 5. Use the arrow keys to select the location of the hard drive, and then press f10. 6. Toggle the Protection field to Disable, and then press f10. 7. Type your master password in the Old Password field. Then press f10. 8. To save your preferences, use arrow keys to select File >

Save Changes and Exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences are set when you exit Computer Setup and take effect when the tablet PC restarts. 914 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security Disabling a Device From the Computer Setup Device Security menu, you can disable or partially disable most ports and drives. 1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the tablet PC. Press f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. To change the language, press f2. For navigation instructions, press f1. 2. Select the Security menu > Device Security, and then enter your preferences. 3. To confirm your preferences, press f10. 4. To save your preferences, select File > Save Changes and Exit. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences are set when you exit Computer Setup and take effect when the tablet PC restarts. Using System Information System information provides details about your tablet PC and battery pack. The following sections explain how to prevent other users from viewing system information and how to configure system information options in Computer Setup. System Information options allow you to Display or enter the tablet PC serial number, asset tag, and ownership tag. Display a battery pack serial number. To prevent unauthorized access to this information, you must create an HP administrator password. For instructions, refer to the Setting HP Administrator Passwords, section earlier in this chapter. Hardware and Software Guide 915 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security Setting System Information Options 1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the tablet PC. Press f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower left of the screen. To change the language, press f2. For navigation instructions, press f1. 2. Access or set your preferences by following these directions:

To view general system information, select the File menu > System Information. To view or enter identification values for system components, select the Security menu > System IDs. 3. To confirm the information or your preferences, press f10. 4. To save your information or preferences, use the arrow keys to select File > Save Changes and Exit, and then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences are set when you exit Computer Setup and take effect when the tablet PC restarts. Firewall Software When you use the tablet PC for e-mail, network, or Internet access, it is possible for unauthorized persons to obtain information about you, your tablet PC, and your data. To protect your privacy, it is recommended that you use firewall software. The Windows operating system firewall is available on your tablet PC and is enabled by default. To learn more about this firewall or to disable or reenable this firewall:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections > Windows Firewall. 916 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security 2. Select the General tab. To learn more about Windows Firewall, select the Learn more about Windows Firewall link. To disable Windows Firewall, select Off (not recommended). To reenable Windows Firewall, select On

(recommended). 3. Select OK. Under some circumstances a firewall can block access to Internet games, interfere with printer or file sharing on a network, or block authorized email attachments. If you are using Windows Firewall and an application attempts an inbound connection to your tablet PC for the first time, a security alert will be displayed. The security alert allows you to configure the firewall permission for the application. To allow the application to connect to your tablet PC, select Unblock this program. The application is added to the Exceptions list and will not be blocked by Windows Firewall. To permanently block the application, select Keep blocking this program. Windows Firewall will block the application anytime the application tries to connect. To temporarily block the application, select Keep blocking this program, but ask me again later. The next time the application attempts to connect to your tablet PC, you will receive the security alert. Hardware and Software Guide 917 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security To manually add an application to the Windows Firewall Exceptions list so that it will not be blocked by the firewall:

1. Select Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections > Windows Firewall. 2. Select the Exceptions tab. 3. Select Add Program and enter the required information about the application. 4. Select OK. The application is added to the Exceptions list and will not be blocked by Windows Firewall. If you are using an optional firewall and you want to allow a blocked application to connect:

Temporarily solve the problem by disabling the firewall, performing the task, and then reenabling the firewall. Permanently resolve the problem by reconfiguring the firewall. Refer to the firewall documentation or contact the firewall manufacturer. 918 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security Connecting an Optional Security Cable Security solutions are designed to act as deterrents. These deterrents may not prevent a product from being mishandled or stolen. To install a security cable:

1. Loop the security cable around a secured object. 2. Insert the key 1 into the cable lock 2. 3. Insert the cable lock into the security cable slot 3, and lock the cable lock with the key. Hardware and Software Guide 919 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security HP ProtectTools Security Manager

(Select Models Only) Your tablet PC comes with HP ProtectTools Security Manager preinstalled. This software is accessed through Microsoft Windows Control Panel. It provides security features that are designed to help protect against unauthorized access to the tablet PC, networks, and critical data. Add-on modules for HP ProtectTools Security Manager include the following:

Embedded Security for ProtectsTools Credential Manager for ProtectTools BIOS Configuration for ProtectTools Smart Card Security for ProtectTools Depending on your tablet PC model, add-on modules may be preinstalled, preloaded, or downloaded from the HP Web site. Visit http://www.hp.com for more information. Embedded Security for ProtectTools You must have the embedded security chip in your tablet PC in order to use Embedded Security for ProtectTools. Embedded Security for ProtectTools has security features that protect against unauthorized access to user data or credentials, which include:

Administrative functions, such as ownership and management of the owner pass phrase. User functions, such as user enrollment and management of user pass phrases. 920 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security Settings configuration, including setting up enhanced Microsoft EFS and Personal Secure Drive for protecting user data. Management functions, such as backing up and restoring the key hierarchy. Credential Manager for ProtectTools Credential Manager for ProtectTools has security features that provide protection against unauthorized access to your tablet PC, including the following:

Alternatives to passwords when logging on to Microsoft Windows. Single sign-on capability that automatically remembers credentials for Web sites, applications, and protected network resources. Support for optional security devices, such as Smart Cards and biometric fingerprint readers. For more information, refer to the Credential Manager for ProtectTools online documentation. BIOS Configuration for ProtectTools BIOS Configuration for ProtectTools provides access to BIOS security and configuration settings within the HP ProtectTools Security Manager application, which gives users better access to system security features that are managed by the system BIOS. With BIOS Configuration for ProtectTools, you can:

Access to power-on user and administrator password management. Configure preboot authentication features, such as smart card and power-on password. Enable and disable hardware features (such as the enable CD-ROM boot). Hardware and Software Guide 921 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap9.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Security Configure boot options, which includes disabling the ability to boot to drives other than the primary hard drive. Many of the features in BIOS Configuration for ProtectTools are also available in Computer Setup. Refer to Chapter 11, Computer Setup for additional information. For more information, refer to the BIOS Configuration for ProtectTools online documentation. Smart Card Security for ProtectTools With Smart Card Security for ProtectTools, you can:

Access optional smart card security features. Security enhancements are supported by the optional HP ProtectTools Smart Card and an optional supported reader, such as the HP PC Card Smart Card Reader. Initialize an HP ProtectTools Smart Card so that it can be used with Credential Manager for ProtectTools. Work with the BIOS to enable optional smart card authentication in a preboot environment, and to configure separate smart cards for an administrator and a user. Set and change the password used to authenticate users to the smart card. Backup and restore credentials stored on the smart card. For more information, refer to the Smart Card Security for ProtectTools online documentation. 922 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap10.fm PN: HP-367186-001 10 MultiBoot A bootable medium or network interface card (NIC) contains files that the tablet PC needs to start and operate properly. The MultiBoot utility, disabled by default, enables you to identify the devices and control the sequence in which the system attempts to boot from those devices as it starts up your tablet PC. Bootable devices include optical drive discs, such as CDs or DVDs, bootable diskettes, or NICs. Some devices, including USB devices and NICs, must be enabled in Computer Setup before they can be included in the boot sequence. For more information, refer to Enabling Bootable Devices in Computer Setup in this chapter. Understanding the Default Boot Sequence By default, when more than one bootable device is in the system, the tablet PC chooses the startup device by searching enabled devices and locations in a predetermined sequence. On every boot, the system looks for bootable drive A devices first. If it fails to find a bootable drive A device, it searches for bootable drive C devices. Drive A devices include optical drives and diskette drives. Drive C devices include optical drives and primary hard drives. The primary hard drive can only boot as drive C. The NIC does not have a drive letter assigned to it. Hardware and Software Guide 101 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap10.fm PN: HP-367186-001 MultiBoot An optical drive device (such as a CD-ROM drive) can boot either as drive A or drive C, depending on the format of the CD. Most bootable CDs boot as drive A. If you have a CD that boots as the C drive, the system will boot the diskette drive before it boots the CD. By default, the tablet PC selects the startup device by searching enabled devices and locations in a predetermined sequence. You can change the sequence in which the tablet PC searches for a startup device by enabling MultiBoot and entering a new startup sequence, also called a boot order. Or, you can use MultiBoot Express to set the tablet PC to prompt you for a startup location each time the tablet PC is started or restarted. The list below describes the default sequence in which drive numbers are assigned. (The actual startup sequence varies by configuration.) Default sequence for devices that boot as drive A:

a. Optical drive in an optional docking device MultiBay or in an external MultiBay that contains a disc that boots as drive A. b. Diskette drive in an optional docking device or in an external MultiBay. Default sequence for devices that boot as drive C:

a. An optical drive in an optional docking device MultiBay or in an external MultiBay that contains a disc that boots as drive C. b. Hard drive in the tablet PC primary hard drive bay. c. Hard drive in an optional docking device MultiBay or in an external MultiBay. Since no drive letter is associated with the NIC, changing the boot order of a NIC does not affect drive letters of the other devices. 102 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap10.fm PN: HP-367186-001 MultiBoot Enabling Bootable Devices in Computer Setup The tablet PC can start up from a USB device or the NIC only if that device has been enabled for inclusion in MultiBoot. To enable a device or location for inclusion in MultiBoot:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the tablet PC. Press f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. To change the language, press f2. For navigation instructions, press f1. 2. To enable bootable media in USB drives or in drives inserted into an optional docking device, use the arrow keys to select Advanced > Device options. Then select Enable USB legacy support.

-or-

To enable a NIC, select Security > Device security. 3. Save your preferences and exit Computer Setup, by using the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences are set when you exit Computer Setup and they take effect when the tablet PC restarts. To connect a NIC to a Preboot eXecution Environment (PXE) or Remote Program Load (RPL) server during startup without using MultiBoot, quickly press f12 when the Network Service Boot message appears in the lower-right corner of the screen. Hardware and Software Guide 103 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap10.fm PN: HP-367186-001 MultiBoot Understanding MultiBoot Results Before changing the startup sequence, consider the following:

When the tablet PC restarts after the boot order has been changed, it considers only the first device of each drive type when searching for a startup device (except for optical devices). For example, the tablet PC is connected to an optional docking device containing an optical drive and a diskette drive. In the default boot sequence, the optical drive comes before the diskette drive. If the system fails to boot to the optical drive (either because it does not contain a disc or because the disc is not bootable) it does not try to boot to the diskette drive. Instead, it tries to boot to he first hard drive device present in the system. However, if there are two optical devices, and the first optical device does not boot, the system tries to boot to other optical devices in the system. Changing the boot sequence also changes the logical drive designations. For example, if you start up from a CD-ROM drive with a disc that boots as drive C, that CD-ROM drive becomes drive C and the hard drive in the hard drive bay becomes drive D. Starting up from a NIC does not affect logical drive designations because no drive letter is associated with the NIC. Drives in an optional docking device are treated like external USB devices in the boot sequence and must be enabled in Computer Setup. 104 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap10.fm PN: HP-367186-001 MultiBoot Setting MultiBoot Preferences There are two ways to set MultiBoot sequences:

Set a new default boot sequence that the tablet PC uses each time it starts up. Use variable boot sequences using MultiBoot Express. This feature prompts you for a startup device each time the tablet PC is started or restarted. Setting a New Default Boot Sequence To set a startup sequence that the tablet PC uses each time it is started or restarted with Computer Setup:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the tablet PC. Press f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. To change the language, press f2. For navigation instructions, press f1. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Advanced > Boot options, and then press enter. 3. Toggle the MultiBoot field to Enable. 4. Toggle the Boot Order fields to the boot sequence that you prefer. 5. Save your preferences and exit Computer Setup by using the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences are set when you exit Computer Setup, and they take effect when the tablet PC restarts. Hardware and Software Guide 105 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap10.fm PN: HP-367186-001 MultiBoot Setting a MultiBoot Express Prompt To set the tablet PC to display the MultiBoot startup location menu each time the tablet PC is started or restarted with Computer Setup:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the tablet PC. Press f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left corner of the screen. To change the language, press f2. For navigation instructions, press f1. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Advanced > Boot options, and then press enter. 3. In the Express Boot Popup Delay (Sec) field, select the length of time in seconds that you want the tablet PC to display the startup location menu before it defaults to the current MultiBoot setting (when 0 is selected, the Express Boot startup location menu is not displayed.) 4. Save your preferences and exit Computer Setup by using the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences are set when you exit Computer Setup, and they take effect when the tablet PC restarts. 106 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap10.fm PN: HP-367186-001 MultiBoot Entering MultiBoot Express Preferences When the Express Boot menu is displayed during startup:

To specify a startup location from the Express Boot menu, select your preference within the allotted time, and then press enter. To prevent the tablet PC from defaulting to the current MultiBoot setting, press any key before the allotted time expires. The tablet PC will not start up until you select a startup location and press enter. To allow the tablet PC to start up according to the current MultiBoot settings, wait for the allotted time to expire. Hardware and Software Guide 107 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap10.fm PN: HP-367186-001 MultiBoot 108 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap11.fm PN: HP-367186-001 11 Computer Setup Using Computer Setup Computer Setup is a preinstalled, ROM-based utility that can be used even when the operating system is not working or will not load. If the operating system is working, the tablet PC restarts the operating system after you exit Computer Setup. Pointing devices are not supported in Computer Setup; you must use the keyboard to navigate and make selections. An external keyboard connected by USB can be used with Computer Setup only if USB legacy support is enabled. For more information about USB, refer to the Connecting a USB Device section in the Hardware Components chapter in this guide. The menu tables later in this chapter provide an overview of Computer Setup options. Hardware and Software Guide 111 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap11.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Computer Setup Accessing Computer Setup The information and settings in Computer Setup are accessed from the File, Security, Tools, and Advanced menus. 1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the tablet PC. Press f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower-left of the screen. To change the language, press f2. To view navigation information, press f1. To return to the Computer Setup menu, press esc. 2. Select the File, Security, Tools, or Advanced menu. 3. To exit Computer Setup, choose one of the following:

To exit without saving any changes, use the arrow keys to select File > Ignore changes and exit, and then follow the instructions on the screen. To exit and save all the settings you have entered, use the arrow keys to select File > Save changes and exit, and then follow the instructions on the screen. Your preferences are set when you exit Computer Setup and take effect when the tablet PC restarts. Restoring Computer Setup Defaults To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the tablet PC. Press f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower left of the screen. To change the language, press f2. To view navigation information, press f1. 2. Use the arrow keys to select File > Restore defaults. 3. Select the Restore Defaults check box. 112 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap11.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Computer Setup 4. To confirm the restoration, press f10. 5. Select File > Save changes and exit, and then follow the instructions on the screen. When the computer restarts, the factory settings are restored, and any identification information you may have entered is saved. Selecting from the File Menu Select System Information Save to floppy Restore from floppy Restore defaults Ignore changes and exit Save changes and exit To Do This View identification information about the tablet PC and any battery packs in the system. View specification information about the processor, memory and cache size, video revision, keyboard controller version, and system ROM. Save system configuration settings to a diskette. Restore system configuration settings from a diskette. Replace configuration settings in Computer Setup with factory default settings. (Identification information is retained.) Cancel changes entered during the current session. Then exit and restart the tablet PC. Save changes entered during the current session. Then exit and restart the tablet PC. The changes you save are in effect when the tablet PC restarts. Hardware and Software Guide 113 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap11.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Computer Setup Selecting from the Security Menu

. Select This Option Administrator password Power-On password Password options DriveLock passwords Smart Card Security To Do This Enter, change, or delete an HP Administrator password. Enter, change, or delete a power-on password. Enable/disable stringent security Enable/disable required password on restart Enable/disable DriveLock; change a DriveLock user or master password. DriveLock settings are accessible only when you enter Computer Setup by turning on

(not restarting) the tablet PC. Enable/disable power-on support for smart cards. This feature is supported by select smart card readers only. 114 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap11.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Select This Option Embedded Security Device security Computer Setup To Do This Enable/Disable the embedded security chip. Restore embedded security chip to factory settings. Enable/disable power-on authentication support. Enable/disable automatic DriveLock. Reset power-on authentication credential. Embedded Security settings are accessible only if the tablet PC is equipped with an embedded security chip. Enable/disable devices in the system. Enable NIC for inclusion in MultiBoot. System IDs Enter user-defined identification values. Hardware and Software Guide 115 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap11.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Computer Setup Selecting from the Tools Menu Select HDD Self Test options Battery Information Memory Check To Do This Run a quick or comprehensive self-test on any hard drive in the system. View information about any battery packs in the tablet PC. Run a self-test on memory modules in the tablet PC. View information about memory modules installed in the tablet PC. Selecting from the Advanced Menu Select Language (or press f2) Boot options To Do This Change the Computer Setup language. Enable/disable QuickBoot, which starts the tablet PC more quickly by eliminating some startup tests. (If you suspect a memory failure and want to test memory automatically during startup, disable QuickBoot.) Enable/disable MultiBoot, which sets a startup sequence that can include most bootable devices and media in the system. For details, refer to the MultiBoot chapter. Set the boot order. 116 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap11.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Select Device options Computer Setup To Do This Enable/disable num lock mode at startup. Enable/disable multiple standard pointing devices at startup. (To set the tablet PC to support only a single, usually nonstandard, pointing device at startup, select Disable.) Select a parallel port mode: EPP

(Enhanced Parallel Port), standard, bidirectional, or ECP (Enhanced Capabilities Port). Enable/disable USB legacy support for a USB keyboard, mouse, and hub. When USB legacy support is enabled:

A USB keyboard, mouse, and hub work even when a Windows operating system is not loaded. The tablet PC starts from a bootable hard drive, diskette drive diskette, or CD, CD-RW, or DVD inserted into a drive connected by a USB connector to the tablet PC or to an optional docking device. Enable/disable all settings in the SpeedStep window. (When Disable is selected, the tablet PC runs in Battery Optimized mode.) Swap the functions of the fn key and left ctrl key. Hardware and Software Guide 117 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap11.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Computer Setup 118 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap12.fm PN: HP-367186-001 12 HP Client Management Solutions HP Client Management Solutions provides standards-based solutions for managing client (user) desktop, workstation, and tablet PCs in a networked environment. The key capabilities and features of client management are Initial software image deployment. Remote system software installation. Software management and updates. ROM updates. Tracking and security of computer assets (the hardware and software installed on the computer). Fault notification and recovery of certain system software and hardware components. Support for specific features described in this chapter may vary, depending on the computer model and/or version of management software installed on your computer. Hardware and Software Guide 121 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap12.fm PN: HP-367186-001 HP Client Management Solutions Configuration and Deployment HP computers come with a preinstalled system software image. The initial software image is configured during the first-time setup of the computer. After a brief software unbundling occurs, the computer is ready to be used. A customized software image can be deployed (distributed) by Installing additional software applications after unbundling the preinstalled software image. Using software deployment tools, such as Altiris Deployment Solutions, to replace the preinstalled software with a customized software image. Using a disk cloning process to copy the contents from one hard drive to another. The deployment method you should use depends on your organizations technology environment and processes. Visit the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/pcsolutions for more information on selecting the best deployment method for your organization. The system recovery discs, Computer Setup utility, and other system features provide further assistance with recovery of system software, configuration management and troubleshooting, and power management. HP Client Manager Software HP Client Manager Software (HP CMS) integrates HP Intelligent Manageability technology within Altiris software. HP CMS provides superior hardware management capabilities for HP devices. It provides Detailed views of hardware inventory for asset management. PC health check monitoring and diagnostics. 122 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap12.fm PN: HP-367186-001 HP Client Management Solutions Web-accessible reporting of business-critical details, such as machines with thermal warnings and memory alerts. Remote updating of system software such as device drivers and ROM BIOS. Additional functionality can be added when HP CMS is used with optional Altiris Solutions software (purchased separately). For more information on HP Client Manager, visit the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/easydeploy. Hardware and Software Guide 123 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap12.fm PN: HP-367186-001 HP Client Management Solutions 124 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap13.fm PN: HP-367186-001 13 Software Update and Recoveries Preparing to Update Software For optimal tablet PC performance and to make sure your tablet PC remains compatible with changing technologies, HP recommends that you install the latest versions of HP software as they become available. To update HP software:

1. Prepare for any update by identifying your tablet PC type, series or family, and model; refer to Accessing Tablet PC Information later in this chapter. Prepare for a system ROM update by identifying (through the Computer Setup utility) the ROM versions currently installed on the tablet PC. 2. Access the updates through your local HP Web site or the Support Software CD (purchased separately). 3. Download and install the updates. The tablet PC system ROM stores the BIOS. The BIOS determines how the tablet PC hardware interacts with the operating system and external devices and also supports such tablet PC services as time and date. If your tablet PC connects to a network, HP recommends that you consult with your network administrator before installing any software updates, especially system ROM updates. Hardware and Software Guide 131 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap13.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Software Update and Recoveries Obtaining the Support Software CD The Support Software CD provides HP software updates and installation instructions. The CD includes device drivers, ROM updates, and utilities. To purchase the current Support Software CD or a subscription that provides both the current version and future versions of the CD, visit the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com. Accessing Tablet PC Information To access the updates for your tablet PC, the following information will be needed:

The product category is Tablet PC. The product family name and series number are printed in the lower-right corner of the display bezel. Model information is provided on the serial number label on the bottom of the tablet PC. To determine whether available ROM updates contain later ROM versions than those currently installed on the tablet PC, you need to know the version of the system ROM currently installed. 132 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap13.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Software Update and Recoveries To display ROM information in Computer Setup:

1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the tablet PC. Press f10 while the F10 = ROM Based Setup message is displayed in the lower left of the screen. To change the language, press f2. For navigation instructions, press f1. 2. Select File > System Information. The system ROM information is displayed. 3. To exit Computer Setup without changing any settings, use the arrow keys to select File > Ignore changes and exit, and then follow the instructions on the screen. After Computer Setup closes, the tablet PC restarts in Windows. For information about using Computer Setup, refer to the Computer Setup chapter. Downloading Software from the Internet Most software on the HP Web site is packaged in compressed files called a SoftPaqs. Some ROM updates may be packaged in compressed files called RomPaqs. Other ROM updates may be provided as CPQFlash SoftPaqs. Most download packages contain a file named Readme.txt. A Readme.txt file contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. The Readme.txt files included with RomPaqs are in English. Hardware and Software Guide 133 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap13.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Software Update and Recoveries Downloading System ROM CAUTION: To prevent an unsuccessful installation, download and install the system ROM only while the tablet PC is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install the system ROM while the tablet PC is running on battery power, docked in an optional port replicator, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation:

Do not unplug the tablet PC from the electrical outlet. Do not shut down the tablet PC. Do not remove or insert a drive. To download and install a system ROM:

1. Access the page on the HP Web site that provides software for your tablet PC. 2. Follow the instructions on the screen to locate the system ROM you want to download. 3. At the download area:

a. Write down the information (date and name) of any update that is later than the system ROM currently installed on your tablet PC. b. Select the software you want and follow the download instructions on the screen. 4. When the download is complete, open Windows Explorer. 5. In Windows Explorer, select My Computer, then the hard drive designation (usually drive C), and then the folder to which you saved the downloaded item. 6. In the folder, select the name or number of the software package containing the system ROM update. The system ROM installation begins. 7. To complete the installation, follow the instructions on the screen. After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the download package from the folder. 134 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap13.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Software Update and Recoveries Downloading Other Software To download and install other software:

1. Access the page at the HP Web site that provides software for your tablet PC. 2. Follow the instructions on the screen to find the software you want to update. 3. At the download area, select the software you want and follow the downloading instructions on the Web page. 4. When the download is complete, open Windows Explorer. 5. In Windows Explorer, select My Computer, then the hard drive designation (usually drive C), and then the folder to which you saved the downloaded item. 6. In the folder, select the name or number of the software package containing the update. 7. Select the file that includes an .EXE extensionfor example, FILENAME.EXE. The installation begins. 8. To complete the installation, follow the instructions on the screen. After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the download package from the folder. System Recovery The tablet PC system recovery process provides several ways to recover system functionality. The Driver Recovery and Operating System discs enable you to recover or repair your tablet PC without losing personal data. The Operating System disc also allows you to reinstall the operating system software provided with the tablet PC. For best results, attempt to recover optimal tablet PC functionality by using the following procedures in the order described here. Hardware and Software Guide 135 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap13.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Software Update and Recoveries Safeguarding Your Data Software or devices added to the tablet PC can cause your system to become unstable. To safeguard your documents, store personal files in the My Documents folder and periodically create a backup copy of My Documents. Setting System Restore Points Tablet PCs with Windows XP operating systems provide the option of setting system restore points (benchmarks) daily as you change your personal settings. The tablet PC may also set restore points when you add new software or devices. You should periodically set system restore points when the tablet PC is functioning at optimal performance and before installing new software or devices. This enables you to return to a previous configuration restore point if you encounter problems. To set a system restore point:

1. Select Start > Help and Support. Select the task Use Tools to view your computer information and diagnose problems. Select System Restore. A System Restore window opens. 2. Follow the on-screen directions for setting a restore point. To restore the tablet PC to a previous date and time when it was functioning optimally:

1. Select Start > Help and Support > Tools > System Restore. 2. Follow the on-screen directions for restoring the tablet PC. 136 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap13.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Software Update and Recoveries Repairing the Operating System To attempt an operating system repair without deleting your personal data, use the Operating System disc that was shipped with the tablet PC:

1. Connect the tablet PC to external power and turn on the tablet PC. 2. Immediately insert the Operating System disc into the tablet PC. 3. Press and hold the power button for 5 seconds to turn off the tablet PC. 4. Press the power button again to start the tablet PC. 5. When prompted, press any key to boot from the disc. After a few minutes, the Welcome to Setup screen is displayed. 6. Press enter to continue. A Licensing Agreement screen is displayed. 7. Press f8 to accept the agreement and continue. The Setup window is displayed. 8. Press R to repair the selected Windows installation. The repair process begins. This process may take up to 2 hours to complete. The tablet PC restarts in Windows after the process is complete. Reinstalling the Operating System CAUTION: Personal data and software you have installed on the tablet PC will be lost during the operating system reinstall. To protect your data, back up your data before reinstalling your operating system. Refer to the Windows online help utility to learn more about backing up your files. If other recovery efforts do not successfully repair the tablet PC, you can reinstall the operating system. Hardware and Software Guide 137 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap13.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Software Update and Recoveries To reinstall the operating system:

1. Connect the tablet PC to external power and turn on the tablet PC. 2. Immediately insert the Operating System disc into the tablet PC. 3. Press and hold the power button for 5 seconds to turn off the tablet PC. 4. Press the power button again to start the tablet PC. 5. When prompted, press any key to boot from the disc. After a few minutes, the Welcome to Setup screen is displayed. 6. Press enter to continue. A Licensing Agreement screen is displayed. 7. Press f8 to accept the agreement and continue. The Setup window is displayed. 8. Press esc to continue installing a new copy of the operating system instead of repairing it. 9. Press enter to set up the operating system. 10. Press C to continue setup using this partition. 11. Select Format the partition using the NTFS file system

(Quick) and press enter. CAUTION: Formatting this drive will delete all current files. 12. Press F to format the drive. The reinstallation process begins. This process may take up to 2 hours to complete. The tablet PC restarts in Windows when the process is complete. When prompted for the product key, refer to the Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label located on the bottom of the tablet PC. 138 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap13.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Software Update and Recoveries Reinstalling Device Drivers and Other Software After the operating system installation process is complete, you must reinstall drivers. To reinstall drivers, use the Driver Recovery disc included with the tablet PC:

1. While running Windows, insert the Driver Recovery disc into the optical drive. If you do not have Autorun enabled, select Start > Run. Then type D:\SWSETUP\APPINSTL\SETUP.EXE (where D indicates the optical drive). 2. Follow the on-screen instructions for installing the drivers. After the drivers are reinstalled, you must reinstall any software you added to the tablet PC. Follow the installation instructions provided with the software. Hardware and Software Guide 139 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap13.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Software Update and Recoveries 1310 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap14.fm PN: HP-367186-001 14 Specifications Operating Environment The operating environment information in the following table might be helpful if you plan to use or transport the tablet in extreme environments. Factor Metric U.S. Temperature Operating

(not writing to optical disc 0C to 35C 32F to 95F Operating (writing to optical disc) 5C to 35C 41F to 95F Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia) Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia)

-15 m to 3,048 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 40,000 ft Hardware and Software Guide 141 hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: Chap14.fm PN: HP-367186-001 Specifications Rated Input Power The power information in this section might be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the tablet PC. The tablet PC operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. Although the tablet PC can be powered from a stand-alone DC power source, it is strongly recommended that the tablet PC be powered only with an AC adapter or DC power cord supplied or approved by HP. The tablet PC is capable of accepting DC power within the following specifications:

Input Power Operating voltage Operating current Rating 18.5 V dc @ 3.5 A - 65 W 3.5 A This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 Vrms. 142 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL August 24, 2004 4:02 pm PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-367186-001 U-Unbranded Part Number DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001IX.fm Index inserting battery pack 216 removing battery pack 216 battery charge information displays hotkey 36 increasing accuracy 224 interpreting 225 battery packs calibrating 228 disposing of 233 monitoring charge 224 primary 216 recycling 233 storing 215, 232 See also battery power battery power conserving 231 low-battery conditions 226 running notebook on 215 See also battery packs bays See also compartments BIOS information, displaying 92 bluetooth 810 A AC adapter connecting 227 disconnecting 215 AC power 215 accessing notebook information 112 adapter, modem 627 adjusting the volume 53 Aircraft Power Adapter connecting 227 airport security devices 62 altitude specifications 111 ambient light sensor 318 analog vs. digital line 625 applications. See software audio-in (microphone) jack 52 audio-out (headphone) jack 52 Automobile Power Adapter/Charger connecting 227 AutoPlay 59 Autorun 59 B battery bay Hardware and Software Guide Index1 hp CONFIDENTIAL PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-367186-001 U-Unbranded Part Number DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001IX.fm Index Brightness item on Q Menu 79 button(s) esc 410 pen 42 Q menu 48 reset 49 rotate 48 Tablet PC Input Panel launch 48 Windows Security 112, 49 See also jog dial; latch;

switch buttons PC Card 611 Presentation mode 312 See also battery pack release latch; display switch; keys C cable lock, security 919 cables modem 625 calibration pen 44 calibration, battery 228 cap, replacing pointing stick 32 Capture Screen item on Q Menu 79 Capture Window item on Q Menu 710 card and socket services, PC Card 69 card. See digital media CD(s) Support Software CD 111 CDs See also recovery discs Change Mode Service 726 command controls identified 46 procedures 48 Quick Reference 47 compartments See also bays Computer Setup accessing 111 Advanced menu 116 changing language in 112 displaying ROM information with 113 File menu 113 navigating 633 notebook information 112 procedures 111 restoring defaults 112 Security menu 114 setting security preferences 92 Tools menu 116 USB legacy support 633, 111 connector(s) drive 62 connectors See also jacks; ports controls, command 46 copyright warning 57 cord Index2 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-367186-001 U-Unbranded Part Number DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001IX.fm Index See also cables affected by airport security country-specific modem cable 62 adapter 627 CPQFlash file 113 critical low-battery condition identifying 226 restoring from 227 ctrl+alt+delete command 49 D Desktop Video Profiles 716 device disabling 915 device drivers external devices 633 PC Card 69 dial, jog described 410 identified 46 digital vs. analog line 625 disc, optical. See CDs; DVDs display switching image to or from 36, 37 display switch caring for 61 See also CDs: DVDs: hard drive shipping 62 DVD region settings 511 DVDs See also recovery discs E electrostatic discharge (ESD) 62, 614 embedded numeric keypad 310 enablers, PC Card 69 enabling internal keypad 310 enter command 410 environmental specifications 111 esc button procedures 410 ESD (electrostatic discharge) setting preferences 316 62 docking station Extended Desktop item on Q affecting presentation Menu 711 mode 712 downloading software 115 system ROM 114 external keypad 311 external monitor 56 switching image 37 External Only item on Q Menu drive media affected by airport 710 security 62 DriveLock 99 drives external video 54 F firewall software 916 fn key 39, 310 Hardware and Software Guide Index3 hp CONFIDENTIAL PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-367186-001 U-Unbranded Part Number DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001IX.fm Index Fn, specific functions of on on-screen keyboard 414 freeze, system 49 function keys (F1, F2, etc.) accessing, on on-screen keyboard 414 H hard drive activity light 64 caring for 61 DriveLock 99 installing, primary 67 removing, primary 65 replacing, primary 64 headphone jack 52 headphones 53 Hibernation exiting 116, 22, 226 file space requirements for 624 initiated during critical low-battery condition 226 initiating 29, 714 resuming from 29 hibernation file 624 holder, pen 45 hotkeys shortcut reference to commands 36 switch image 37 with external keyboards 39 HP administrator password 98 HP password 94 HP password guidelines 95 hub, USB 632 humidity specifications 111 I increasing memory 624 infrared 629, 630 initiating Hibernation 29 initiating Standby 210 installing CD and DVD software 58 installing the primary hard drive 67 Internal and External item on Q Menu 711 Internal Only item on Q Menu 710 Internet Connection Firewall 916 J jack(s) audio line-out 53 microphone input 53 RJ-11 625 S-Video out 55 jacks See also connectors: ports jog dial procedures 410 K key(s) Fn 39, 310 Index4 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-367186-001 U-Unbranded Part Number DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001IX.fm Index function 39 hotkeys 39 internal keyboard 310 num lk 310 shortcut 39 keyboard external 39 USB 632 keyboard, external 38 keyboard, external USB supported 41 keyboard, on-screen 414 keypads enabling/disabling 310 external 311 internal 39 keys See also buttons; display switch L landscape orientation defined 411 Landscape View, Primary and Secondary 411 Landscape-Primary item on Q Menu 712 Landscape-Secondary item on Q Menu 713 latch See also buttons: display switch light num lock 310 lights IDE drive activity 64 lock, security cable 919 low-battery conditions identifying 226 resolving 227 M media, drive affected by airport security 62 memory adding expansion memory module 614 increasing RAM 624 primary memory module, replacing 619 upgrading primary board 614 microphone 52 internal 52 jack 52 microphone jack 52 modem cable 625 connecting 626 country-specific adapter 626, 627 jack 625 modes presentation 712, 720 undocked 717 viewing 717 writing 719 monitor switching image 316 monitor, external 56 switching display 37 Hardware and Software Guide Index5 hp CONFIDENTIAL PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-367186-001 U-Unbranded Part Number DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001IX.fm Index mouse, external setting preferences for 41 supported 41 MultiBay II external 634 Mute On/Off item on Q Menu 79 N network connecting 629 noise suppression circuitry 628 num lock key 310 light 310 number keys, on on-screen keyboard 414 numeric keypad 310 numeric keypad. See keypad, external; keypad, internal NVIDIA nView Desktop Manager Utility 716 O operating environment specifications 111 operating system 916 passwords 94 security 91 optical disc. See CDs; DVDs optical drive activity light 64 See also CDs; drives;

DVDs overhead projector switching display to or from 36 P passwords DriveLock 910 forgetting 93 HP 94 HP administrator 98 HP guidelines 95 power-on 96 using 93 Windows 94 Windows guidelines 95 passwords, coordinating 95 PC Card buttons 611 enablers and card and socket services 69 inserting 69, 610 removing 611 stopping 611 types 69 PCMCIA cards 69 pen attaching 45 button 42 calibration 44 components 11 entering information with 42 Help and tutorials 41 Journal application 41 pen-activated buttons 46 setting preferences for 45 Index6 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-367186-001 U-Unbranded Part Number DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001IX.fm Index pointing device preferences See also cables 34 pointing device(s) command controls 46 pen 41 setting preferences for 45 pointing stick cap, replacing 32 using 32 Port Replicator (optional) enabling USB legacy support 117 identification information 113 port, infrared 629 portrait orientation defined 411 Portrait View, Primary and Secondary 411 Portrait-Primary item on Q Menu 712 Portrait-Secondary item on Q Menu 712 ports See also connectors; jacks power schemes 315 See also battery pack;

Hibernation; shutdown procedures; Standby switching between AC and battery 215 See also battery power Power Controls item on Q Menu 714 power cord power-on password. See passwords presentation mode described 720 Presentation Mode On/Off item on Q Menu 712 profile for 722 Presentation mode button 312 Presentation mode preferences, setting 315 profiles, Desktop Manager Utility 716 projector 56 switching display 37 Q Q Menu button 72 closing 72 controls 72 described 48 displaying 72 icon 72 items, number supported 74 items, obtaining information about 73 selecting item from 73 setting preferences for 74 testing items on 73 Q menu button procedures 48 Q Menu system-defined items Brightness 79 Hardware and Software Guide Index7 hp CONFIDENTIAL PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-367186-001 U-Unbranded Part Number DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001IX.fm Index Capture Screen 79 Capture Window 710 Extended Desktop 711 External Only 710 Hibernate 714 Internal and External 711 Internal Only 710 Landscape-Primary 712 Landscape-Secondary 713 Mute On/Off 79 Portrait-Primary 712 Portrait-Secondary 712 Power Controls 714 Presentation Mode On/Off 712 Q Menu Settings 715 Shut Down 714 Standby 714 Tablet PC Settings 715 Volume 79 Wireless On/Off 79 R RAM (random access memory) 624 rated input power specifications 112 region settings, DVD 511 replacing primary hard drive 64 replacing the primary memory module 619 reset (emergency shut down) 49 resuming from Hibernation 29 resuming from Standby 210 ROMPaq 113 rotate button procedures 48 setting preferences for 411 S Safeguarding Data 116 SD (Secure Digital) Card 612, 613 security cable lock, connecting 919 security features on notebook Computer Setup 92 Quick Reference 91 Setup utility resetting the tablet PC 49 setting security preferences 92 shortcut keys with external keyboards 39 shutting down the notebook 28 shutting down the tablet PC 49 slots memory 622 SD Card 612 socket services, PC Card 69 SoftPaq 113 software firewall 92, 916 Index8 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-367186-001 U-Unbranded Part Number DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001IX.fm Q Menu 71 setting up 42 Setup utility 49 Tablet PC Input Panel 414 Task Manager 49 Windows Security window 49 software updates 111 CPQFlash file 113 determining current version of system ROM 112 identifying software packages 113 ROMPaq 113 SoftPaq 113 updating system ROM from Internet 113 Sonic RecordNow! 511 speakers 52 speakers, external connecting 53 specifications operating environment 111 rated input power 112 Standby avoiding with infrared 631 exiting 116, 22 initiated during critical low-battery condition 226 initiating 210, 714 initiating with hotkey 36 resuming from 210 Index Standby item on Q Menu 714 Support Software CD 111 S-Video 54 connecting cable 55 jack 55 switch, display setting preferences 316 switching display and image 36 system information 36 system information, displaying 916 system lockup 49 System Restore Points 116 system ROM (Read Only Memory) defined 111 determining current version of 112 T tab button procedures 49 Tablet PC Button Driver 727 Tablet PC Input Panel application 414 Tablet PC Input Panel launch button procedures 48 Tablet PC Settings item on Q Menu 715 telephone (RJ-11) jack modem cable 625 television connecting audio 55 connecting video 55 Hardware and Software Guide Index9 hp CONFIDENTIAL PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-367186-001 U-Unbranded Part Number DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001IX.fm Index S-Video jack 55 switching image to or from 36 temperature specifications 111 storage, for battery packs 232 traveling with notebook environmental specifications 112 traveling with the notebook Aircraft Power Adapter 111, 227 Automobile Power Adapter/Charger 227 battery pack temperature considerations 232 protecting hardware connectors 612 turning off the tablet PC 49 turning the notebook on or off 28 U UDF (Universal Disc Format) Reader 59 undocked mode described 717 profile for 721 Universal Disc Format (UDF) Reader 59 updating software 111 USB connectors 632 devices 632, 633 hubs 632 legacy support 633 USB legacy support 111 user passwords. See passwords V VCR connecting audio 55 connecting video 55 switching image to or from 36 video devices S-Video jack 55 switching image to or from 36 viewing mode described 717 profile for 721 volume down button 51 mute 51 mute light 51 up button 51 volume controls 53 Volume item on Q Menu 79 W Windows administrator password. See passwords Windows firewall 92, 916 Windows Media Player 510 Windows password guidelines 95 Windows Security button identified 112 procedures 49 Windows user password. See passwords Index10 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-367186-001 U-Unbranded Part Number DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001IX.fm Index WinDVD Creator Plus 510 WinDVD Player 510 wireless button 812 types of WLAN adapters 88 wireless local area network

(WLAN) 87 WLAN software 89 Wireless On/Off item on Q Menu 79 WLAN identifying devices 87 software 89 troubleshooting 89 types 88 writing mode described 719 profile for 721 Hardware and Software Guide Index11 hp CONFIDENTIAL PN: CPQ-CPQ Part Number HP-367186-001 U-Unbranded Part Number DRAFT Revised: 8/24/04 File: 367426-001IX.fm Index Index12 Hardware and Software Guide hp CONFIDENTIAL

353841-B25.book Page i Wednesday, May 26, 2004 1:13 PM Wireless Device Regulatory Notices Document Part Number: 353841-B25 May 2004 353841-B25.book Page ii Wednesday, May 26, 2004 1:13 PM 353841-B25.book Page iii Wednesday, May 26, 2004 1:13 PM Contents Wireless Device Regulatory Notices U.S. Wireless Notices . 2 Canadian Regulatory Notice . 2 European Regulatory Notice . 2 Indian Notice . 4 Brazilian Notice . 5 Japanese Notices . 5 353841-B25.book Page iv Wednesday, May 26, 2004 1:13 PM 353841-B25.book Page 1 Wednesday, May 26, 2004 1:13 PM Wireless Device Regulatory Notices Some computer models are shipped with one or more integrated wireless devices installed. This document includes governmental and agency regulatory notices that apply to integrated wireless devices. Some notices may not apply to your computer. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this device, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify wireless network devices on your computer, open the Device Manger utility using the following steps:

1. Select Start > My Computer > View system information. 2. Select the Hardware tab, and then select the Device Manager button. 3. Expand the Network adapters list to identify the wireless network devices installed on your computer. Wireless Device Regulatory Notices 1 353841-B25.book Page 2 Wednesday, May 26, 2004 1:13 PM Wireless Device Regulatory Notices U.S. Wireless Notices WARNING: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches) during normal operation, including when the computer display is closed. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Canadian Regulatory Notice Operation is subject to two conditions. The first is that the wireless device may not cause interference. The second is that the wireless device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. European Regulatory Notice This notice is for wireless LAN radio products that will be used indoors, specifically in the home and office environment operating in the 2.4-GHz and 5.0-GHz band. 0336 2 Wireless Device Regulatory Notices Wireless Device Regulatory Notices 353841-B25.book Page 3 Wednesday, May 26, 2004 1:13 PM 0682 0984 Declaration of Conformity This product complies with the following EU directives:

Low Voltage Directive (72/73/EEC) EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC) CE compliance of this equipment is valid only if powered with a CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European Norms (in parentheses are the equivalent international standards and regulations):

EN 55022 (CISPR 22)Electromagnetic interference EN 55024 (IEC 61000-4-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11) Electromagnetic immunity EN 61000-3-2 (IEC 61000-3-2)Power line harmonics EN 61000-3-3 (IEC 61000-3-3)Power line flicker EN 60950 (IEC 60950)Product safety EN 300 328-2Data transmission equipment operating in the 2.4-GHz ISM band and using 2.4-GHz radio equipment using spread spectrum techniques EN 301 489-1, -17General EMC requirements for radio equipment EN 301 893Broadband Radio Access Networks (BRAN);

5-GHz high performance RLAN Wireless Device Regulatory Notices 3 353841-B25.book Page 4 Wednesday, May 26, 2004 1:13 PM Wireless Device Regulatory Notices The 2.4-GHz and 5.0-GHz radio functionality of this product may be used in the following EU, EU candidate, and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. France Lutilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz Wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis linterieur dun batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 1-13). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 10-13). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy Enecessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per luso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Indian Notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a or IEEE 802.11g wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning &

Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. 4 Wireless Device Regulatory Notices 353841-B25.book Page 5 Wednesday, May 26, 2004 1:13 PM Wireless Device Regulatory Notices Brazilian Notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Japanese Notices WLAN 802.11b Devices 2. 4DS 4 Wireless Device Regulatory Notices 5 353841-B25.book Page 6 Wednesday, May 26, 2004 1:13 PM Wireless Device Regulatory Notices Bluetooth Devices 2 . 4 F H 1 WLAN 802.11g Devices 2. 4OF 4 6 Wireless Device Regulatory Notices 353841-B25.book Page i Wednesday, May 26, 2004 1:13 PM 353841-B25.book Page ii Wednesday, May 26, 2004 1:13 PM Copyright 2003, 2004 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Fifth Edition May 2004 First Edition October 2003 353841-B25

Contents: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Broadcom 54g WLAN BCM94306MPLNA User Manual Introduction Completing the Setup Utility Functions Specifications Regulatory Information Company Copyright Statement Company Trademark Statement. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks owned by Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. WLCARD-UG200-D2 01.30.03 file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/index.htm [1/30/03 10:11:15 PM]

Introduction: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to Contents Introduction: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual The Company 54g WLAN Solution Using the Company 54g WLAN Features and Requirements The Company 54g WLAN Solution The Company 54g WLAN solution accesses wireless local area networks (LANs), enables the sharing of a local printer and files with others in the network, accesses the Internet, and enables roaming about the officewire-free. This wireless LAN solution is designed for both the home user and small businessesand it is scalable so that users can be added and new network features can be enabled as networking needs grow. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (defined in IEEE Std 802.11, 1999 Edition) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. The use of the WEP key is optional and can be enabled or disabled. If the network being connecting to has enabled WEP, WEP must also be enabled in the network profile and the WEP key must be set to match the WEP key used by the network. Otherwise, it is impossible to connect to the network. The Company 54g enabled notebook makes a wireless connection to a network, as illustrated on the following figure. Networks 1 and 2 are infrastructure type of networks. The two notebook computers connected by radio waves form an ad hoc type of network. Enterprise Users file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (1 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]

Introduction: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Obtain the following information from the network administrator:

Network names (SSID) of the specific wireless networks to connect to WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) key information (if any) for the networks to connect to For Microsoft Windows networking, the customer name and workgroup name For a network account, a user name and password An IP address (if not using a DHCP server) Home Users The access point (AP) that communicates with the Company 54g enabled notebook has a preassigned network name

(SSID) that the notebook recognizes upon startup. To enable WEP, use any string of numbers for the WEP key. Upon startup, the Company 54g enabled notebook detects certain wireless networks (WLANs) that are within range. Before connecting to these and other wireless networks, configure a profile for each network.See Completing the setup. Using the Company 54g WLAN The Company 54g enabled notebook is an IEEE 802.11g based wireless LAN device. A LAN is composed of two or more computers that are connected to each other to share files or common equipment such as a printer or an Internet connection. A wireless LAN provides the same functionality of a wired network, but it eliminates the need to install networking cables and other networking equipment. Not only is a wireless LAN easier to deploy, but it also allows for roaming. For example, when using the Company 54g enabled notebook, it is possible to roam from a conference room to an office without being disconnected from the network. Features and Requirements An IEEE 802.11 based wireless LAN includes the following features:

Support for IEEE 802.11g draft specification Support for IEEE 802.11b standard 2.4-GHz band operation Network data rate of up to 54 Mbit/s Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption The following items are needed for participating in a wireless LAN:

Company 54g enabled notebook computer running on a Microsoft Windows XP operating system Software compact disc containing the drivers, software reference guide, and Help file The Company 54g enabled notebook works with any Wi-Fi CERTIFIED base station or wireless client adapter. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (2 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]

Introduction: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to top Back to Contents Ccopyright and Trademark Information. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/intro.htm (3 of 3) [1/30/03 10:11:16 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to Contents Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual NOTEBefore starting, obtain the required network information from the network administrator or the wireless access point installer (see The Company 54g WLAN Solution in Introduction). Modes of Operation Configuring a Network Profile Modes of Operation A wireless LAN can be configured for two different modes of operation: infrastructure network and computer-to-computer

(ad hoc) network. Whereas each mode has its advantages, one mode may be more appropriate than the other, depending on the location and type of network connection. Infrastructure Mode The key difference between the infrastructure type of network and an ad hoc network is that the infrastructure network includes a base station (host) computer that has a built-in wireless network adapter and is connected to a wireless access point (AP). This functionality allows computers on the infrastructure wireless LAN to access the resources and tools of the wired LAN, including Internet access, e-mail, file transfers, and printer sharing. Characteristics Networked computers communicate with each other through a dedicated AP. All data transmitted between the computers on this wireless LAN passes through the AP. Advantages Extended range. The access point extends the range of the wireless LAN. Each computer can communicate with other computers equipped by wireless networks that are within the range of the access point. Roaming. As the user moves around the home or office, the Company 54g enabled notebook determines the best access point to use to ensure continuous communication with the network. Network connectivity. An access point can provide wireless LAN access to an existing wired network by bridging the two networks together. This gives users of the wireless LAN access to all the functions of a wired networkfrom file server access to e-mail and the Internet. Disadvantages Because the infrastructure mode offers more features, it requires additional components and setup time to deploy. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (1 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Requirements A base station computer having a wired connection to the Internet, a wireless network adapter, and a connection to an AP. Computer-to-Computer Mode A peer-to-peer (ad hoc) network is the easiest to deploy and is ideal for home use or in small offices. This mode allows the sharing of files with other employees, printing to a shared office printer, and access to the Internet through a shared modem. With ad hoc networking, however, the computer is only able to communicate with other wireless networks that are within a certain range and are in the same wireless workgroup. Characteristics Networked computers send data directly to each other. Advantages Simple setup Cost efficiency Disadvantages Communication is limited to those who are located within a certain range. Configuring a Network Profile To connect to a wireless network, a network profile for that network must be configured on the Company 54g enabled notebook. If the Company 54g enabled notebook computer came with the Company 54g WLAN card already installed and set up at the factory, follow the network profile configuration instructions provided below. NOTEFor more information on how to configure a network profile and IEEE 802.1x authentication, click Learn about setting up wireless network configuration at the bottom of the Wireless Networks tab of Wireless Network Connection Properties. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection you want to configure by doing the following. 1. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (2 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Click the Wireless Networks tab. You can configure a network profile for networks that are listed under Available networks as well as those that are not listed. When you have completed configuring a network profile, the network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. The computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the list. Follow the applicable instruction set below, based on whether or not the network is listed and whether or not the network requires a WEP key (check with your network administrator to see if a WEP key is required). NOTEBoth the network name and the network key are case-sensitive. Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP key Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (3 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Under Available networks, click the network name, and then click Configure. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (4 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (5 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 5. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (6 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Under Available networks, click the network name, and then click Configure. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (7 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 5. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 6. Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 7. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (8 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 8. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (9 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (10 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 5. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (11 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 6. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that network. If the Configuring a Profile for a Network That Is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key 1. Open Network Connections and then open Properties for the Wireless Network Connection to configure by doing the following. a. Click Start, and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Right-click Wireless Network Connection, and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (12 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 2. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 3. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (13 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box and again in the Confirm network key box. 5. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 6. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 7. Type the network key in the Network key box and again in the Confirm network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 8. Click OK. The network name and icon appear at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (14 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Completing the Setup: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 9. Click OK to activate the network connection. To verify that the network connection has been made, reopen Wireless Network Connection Properties for that wireless network and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the selected network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon network. If the bubble does not appear, click Refresh. If it still does not appear, try to access a Web page to verify that an Internet connection exists. for that Back to top Back to Contents Copyright and Trademark Information. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/setup.htm (15 of 15) [1/30/03 10:11:18 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to Contents Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Running Utility Functions Adding a New Network to the List of Preferred Networks Viewing or Modifying the Wireless Network Properties Setting Up an Ad Hoc (Peer-to-Peer) Group Network for Connecting to the Internet Adding an Ad Hoc Network Disabling the Radio Running Utility Functions The utility functions and details for the wireless network connection are available in Control Panel. These functions include Disabling the network device, Renaming the connection, View status of this connection, and Change settings of this connection. Changing Settings 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click Network Connections. 3. Click Wireless Network Connections, and then click Change settings of this connection. Click the Wireless Network tab to configure available networks, add and remove networks, and change network properties. Click the General tab, then click Configure To change the properties of the network adapter, click the Advanced tab. To view details about the driver files, update the driver for the device, roll back to the previous driver, or to uninstall the driver, click the Driver tab. To view resource settings, click the Resources tab. To change power management settings, click the Power Management tab. The Advanced tab in Network Adapter Properties lists the properties for the Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) adapter. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (1 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual IBSS Channel Number selects the independent basic service set (IBSS) channel number on which to operate. The Company 54g enabled notebook comes preset for use on channels 111. This setting is acceptable in most countries. Some countries allow use on more channels. If you travel to a country that allows the use of other channels, change the IBSS Channel Number to that number. Locale selects the adapter properties that comply with the operating regulations for that locale. The Locale settings include USA, Israel, Japan, Jordan, Thailand, and Worldwide. This wireless LAN device is normally preset by default for the country in which the device is sold. Before operating this WLAN device, verify that the locale selection is correct by following the steps described in Changing Settings above. On the Advanced tab of HP WLAN 54g W450 Network Adapter Properties, Click Locale In the Value list, select the appropriate regional location If you travel to other countries with the Company 54g enabled notebook, follow the same steps to change the locale setting to match the destination country. Reset the locale setting back to the appropriate home setting after returning. If the destination country is not listed, change the Locale setting to Worldwide. Radio Enable/Disable allows you to turn the radio on or off as necessary to comply with restrictions prohibiting the emission of radio signals, such as during takeoff and landing onboard a commercial aircraft. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (2 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Rate sets the transmission rate. The default setting is Use best rate. This automatically adjusts the data rate to the optimal rate based on the capabilities of the other clients and access points. The default values for the properties listed below are set for maximum performance. Therefore, It is not recommended for home users to change the settings for any of these properties. Only network administrators or persons having technical wireless LAN experience should attempt to change any of the settings. Fragmentation Threshold is the threshold at which the IEEE 802.11 adapter break the packet into multiple frames. IBSS 54g (TM) Mode is used to set the connection type in an ad hoc network. The following options are available:

54g - 802.11b compatible links at the best rate with an IEEE 802.11b and an IEEE 802.11g network

(recommended setting). 54g - Performance links only with IEEE 802.11g networks at the highest rate. In addition it excludes IEEE 802.11b networks. 802.11b Mode links only with IEEE 802.11b networks at the highest rate. In addition it excludes IEEE 802.11g networks. Locally Administered MAC Address is used to override the MAC address of the Company 54g Wireless LAN adapter. PLCP Header is used to set the header type used for CCK rates. Can be long, auto (short/long). Power Output is used for putting out a percentage of the maximum output power. Power Save Mode is used to put the Company 54g enabled notebook into the IEEE 802.11 Power Save mode. In Power Save mode, the radio is periodically powered down to conserve power. When in Power Save mode, packets are stored in the AP until the STA comes on. Adding a New Network to the List of Preferred Networks If the Company 54g enabled notebook is running at a location in which a wireless LAN is operating, and it is within range of the access point, the computer automatically connects to the network at the top of the list under Preferred networks. A network profile must be configured for each network to add to the list To add a new network to the list of preferred networks, first check to see if the new network is listed on the Wireless Networks tab under Available networks. If it is, follow the applicable instructions below according to which operating system your computer is running and whether or not the network requires a WEP key. NOTESee the network administrator or the wireless access point installer to obtain a WEP key, as necessary. See Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key in Completing the Setup See Configuring a Profile for a Listed Network That Requires a WEP Key in Completing the Setup. If the network being added to the Preferred networks list is not listed in the Available networks list, follow the applicable instructions below according to which operating system the computer is running and whether or not the network requires a WEP key. See Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Does Not Require a WEP Key in Completing the Setup See Configuring a Profile for a Network That is Not Listed and Requires a WEP Key in Completing the Setup. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (3 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Viewing or Modifying the Wireless Network Properties 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. 4. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings box is selected. If it is not, select it. 5. Under Preferred networks click the network name and then click Properties. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (4 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual It is possible to enable or disable WEP data encryption and change the network name and the network key (see Completing the setup for instructions). Setting Up an Ad Hoc (Peer-to-Peer) Group Network for Connecting to the Internet To connect the computers in an ad hoc group network to the Internet, the Windows Internet connection sharing (ICS) component must be installed. ICS installation is not required, however, for communication among a group of computers that have a Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) installed in each computer. An ad hoc network must be added under Preferred networks. See Running Utility Functions. Select a desktop computer to serve as the host computer; all other computers are called clients. The host computer must be running the Windows XP operating system. The host computer is the only computer that connects directly to the Internet. Company recommends using the desktop computer having the fastest microprocessor and the most memory as the host computer. NOTEInternet connection sharing requires that the host computer have either a modem or another network adapter in addition to a wireless network adapter. The modem or the additional network adapter is used to access the Internet. The file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (5 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Company 54g enabled notebook is used to share the Internet connections with other clients. Setting Up Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) on the Host Computer 1. Connect the host computer to the Internet. 2. From the host computer Start menu, select Help and Support. 3. Perform a search on Internet Connection Sharing. 4. From the Pick a task list, select Enable Internet Connection Sharing on a Network Connection. 5. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete setting up ICS

. Adding an Ad Hoc Network An ad hoc network (for peer-to-peer communicating) can either require a WEP key or not. Instructions for adding and configuring an ad hoc network for both types of ad hoc networks are provided below:

Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Requires a WEP Key Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Does Not Require a WEP Key 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (6 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (7 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 5. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box. 6. Select the This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network; wireless access points are not used box. 7. Clear the Data encryption (WEP enabled) and the The Key is provided for me automatically boxes if they are selected. 8. Click OK. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (8 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 9. Click Advanced. 10. Select Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) networks only, and click Close. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (9 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 11. Click OK. The added ad hoc network appears at the top of the list under Preferred networks. 12. To verify that the computer is connected to the added ad hoc network, reopen the Network Properties window and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the added network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for the ad hoc network. Adding an Ad Hoc Network That Requires a WEP Key 1. Click Start, then click Control Panel. 2. Click Wireless Network Connection, then click Change settings of this connection. 3. Click the Wireless Networks tab. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (10 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:19 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 4. Verify that the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings box is selected. If it is not, select it. 5. Click Add. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (11 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 6. Select the Data encryption (WEP enabled) box. 7. Type the network name in the Network name (SSID) box and again in the Confirm network key box. 8. Clear the The key is provided for me automatically box. 9. Type the network key in the Network key box. NOTEIt is not necessary to select the Key format or the Key length before typing the network key. These settings automatically change to the appropriate setting as the network key is typed. 10. Select the This is a computer-to-computer (ad hoc) network; wireless access points are not used box. 11. Click OK. 12. Click Advanced file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (12 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 13. Select Computer-to-computer (ad hoc) networks only, and click Close. 14. Click OK. The added ad hoc network appears at the top of the list under Preferred networks. file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (13 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Utility Functions: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual 15. To verify that the computer is connected to the added ad hoc network, reopen the Network Properties window and click the Wireless Networks tab. The computer is connected to the added network when a blue bubble appears on top of the icon for that network. Disabling the Radio To disable the radio on the Company 54g enabled notebook, right-click the wireless network connection icon in the system tray and click Disable. Back to top Back to Contents Copyright and Trademark Information file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/utility.htm (14 of 14) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Specifications: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Back to Contents Specifications: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Physical Characteristics Temperature and Humidity Limitations Power Characteristics Networking Characteristics Radio Characteristics Physical Characteristics Characteristic Description Form Factor Mini PCI specification, May 2002. Type IIIA form factor Dimensions (length, width) 59.6 mm 50.95 mm Temperature and Humidity Limitations Condition Description Operating Temperature 0 to 70C Operating Humidity 95% maximum (no condensation allowed) Storage Temperature 40 to 90C Storage Humidity 95% maximum (no condensation allowed) Power Characteristics Characteristic IEEE 802.11g Operation IEEE 802.11b Operation Values Doze Mode 40 mA Receive Mode 400 mA Transmit Mode 600 mA Power Supply 3.3 V 40 mA 220 mA 330 mA 3.3 V file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/specs.htm (1 of 2) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Specifications: Company 54g Wireless LAN (WLAN) User Manual Networking Characteristics Characteristic Compatibility Description IEEE Std 802.11b and IEEE Draft Std 802.11g for wireless LAN Network Operating System Microsoft Windows Networking Host Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Medium Access Protocol CSMA/CA (collision avoidance) with acknowledgment (ACK) Data rate (Mbps) IEEE Draft Std 802.11g: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 IEEE Std 802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 NOTEThe Company 54g WLAN solution uses an automatic transmit rate select mechanism Radio Characteristics Characteristic Description Frequency Band 2.4 GHz (IEEE 802.11b, IEEE Draft Std 802.11g) Modulation Technique Direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) CCK for high and medium transmit rate DQPSK for standard transmit rate DBPSK for low transmit rate Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) 52 subcarriers with BPSK, QPSK, 16-QAM or 64-QAM Forward error correction convolutional coding rate: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4 Spreading 11-chip Barker sequence Bit Error Rate (BER) Better than 10(5) ppm Nominal Output Power IEEE Std 802.11b: 14 dBm; IEEE Draft Std 802.11g: 15 dBm NOTESee Regulatory Information for country-specific performance characteristics and use restrictions. Back to top Back to Contents file:///P|/User%20Manuals/HP%20XP%20WLAN%20Card/specs.htm (2 of 2) [1/30/03 10:11:20 PM]

Copyright and Trademark Information Back to Contents Regulatory Information Operational Information Regulatory Information Operational Information Wireless Interoperability The Integrated 54g enabled notebook is designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) and orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:

IEEE Std 802.11b-1999. Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN IEEE Std 802.11g-2002. Draft standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN Safety The Integrated 54g enabled notebook, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by this devices, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The Integrated 54g enabled notebook operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of a Integrated 54g enabled notebook may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations include the following:

Using the Integrated 54g enabled notebook onboard airplanes, or Using the Integrated 54g enabled notebook in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (an airplane, for example), ask for authorization to use the Integrated 54g enabled notebook before turning it on. Regulatory Statements for BCM94306MPLNA USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canada Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. The term "IC" before the equipment certification number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that required for successful communication. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Pour empecher que cet appareil cause du brouillage au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, il doit etre utilize a l'interieur et devrait etre place loin des fenetres afin de Fournier un ecram de blindage maximal. Si le matriel (ou son antenne d'emission) est installe a l'exterieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas website www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. EuropeEU Declaration of Conformity and Restrictions Hereby, Broadcom Corp, declares that this equipment complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. This equipment is marked with the community. 0984 symbol and can be used throughout the European This indicates compliance with the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC and meets the relevant parts of following technical specifications:

EN 300 328 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband Transmission Systems;

Data transmission equipment operating in the 2,4GHz ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques;

Harmonized EN covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive. EN 301 489-17 - Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters (ERM); Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 17 Specific Conditions for Wideband Data and HIPERLAN Equipment. EN 60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment. EN 50385 Product standard to demonstrate the compliances of radio base stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems with the basic restrictions or the reference levels related to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields. Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. France - 2.4GHz for Metropolitan France :

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power

(EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Taiwan DGT warning statement Translation:

Article 14 Without permission granted, the frequency change, transmitting power enhance or alter of original design characteristic as well as function by company, enterprise, or user for approved Low-power radio frequency devices is not allowed. Article 17 Low-power radio-frequency devices shall not influence aircraft security and interfere legal communications; If found, shall cease operating immediately until no interference is achieved. Above mentioned Legal Communications is defined as radio communications operation follows Telecommunications Act. Low-power radio-frequency devices must susceptible with the interference from legal communications, ISM radio wave radiated devices.

348376-B22.book Page i Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Installation Guide WLAN Mini PCI Card Installation Guide (GR) Installation Guide (LA) Installation Guide (FR) Installation Guide (IT) Installation Guide (JP) Installation Guide (KR) Installation Guide (CH) Installation Guide (TW) Document Part Number: 348376-B22 July 2004 348376-B22.book Page iii Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Copyright 2003, 2004 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Installation Guide WLAN Mini PCI Card Second Edition July 2004 First Edition July 2004 Document Part Number: 348376-B22 348376-B22.book Page v Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Contents English Before You Begin . 1 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card . 2 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software . 5 Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card. 6 Information and Updates . 8 German Before You Begin . 9 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card . 10 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software . 13 Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card. 14 Information and Updates . 16 Spanish (Latin American) Before You Begin . 17 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card . 18 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software . 21 Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card. 22 Information and Updates . 24 Installation Guide v 348376-B22.book Page vi Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Contents French Before You Begin . 25 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card . 26 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software . 29 Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card. 30 Information and Updates . 32 Italian Before You Begin . 33 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card . 34 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software . 37 Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card. 38 Information and Updates . 40 Japanese Before You Begin . 41 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card . 42 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software . 45 Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card. 46 Information and Updates . 48 Korean Before You Begin . 49 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card . 50 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software . 53 Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card. 54 Information and Updates . 56 vi Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page vii Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Contents S Chinese Before You Begin . 57 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card . 58 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software . 61 Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card. 62 Information and Updates . 64 T Chinese Before You Begin . 65 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card . 66 Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software . 69 Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card. 70 Information and Updates . 72 Regulatory Notices Installation Guide vii 348376-B22.book Page viii Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM 348376-B22.book Page 1 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM English Before You Begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a Mini PCI device authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Help and Support Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Save your work, exit all applications, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power cord. 4. Remove the battery pack. 5. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the Mini PCI slot location. Access the Mini PCI slot. The Mini PCI slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. Installation Guide 1 348376-B22.book Page 2 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM English Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. If your computer has a WLAN Mini PCI card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 2 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 3 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM English 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1 and press the Mini PCI card down 2 until the side latches snap into place. Installation Guide 3 348376-B22.book Page 4 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM English 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the Mini PCI card. The gray

(aux) cable connects to the antenna connector closest to the edge of the Mini PCI card, and the black (main) cable connects to the antenna connector closer to the center of the card, as shown in the following illustration. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If antenna cable is inserted into connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before You Begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. This could reduce wireless performance or cause the Mini PCI device to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 4 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 5 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM English Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software The installation CD included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the Mini PCI card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the CD may be available. Refer to the Information and Updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard is displayed.) 3. Insert the WLAN software CD included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer. (The Found New Hardware wizard installs the device driver from the CD.) If the Found New Hardware wizard does not automatically load the driver from the CD, follow the prompts to point the wizard to the CD drive to install the device driver) Installation of the device driver is complete. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Atheros Client Utility or Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. Both Wireless LAN utilities are located on the WLAN Software CD included with your option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 5 348376-B22.book Page 6 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM English Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the Mini PCI card by lifting the cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage or break off the connector. 6 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 7 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM English 3. Pull the release latches 1 in the direction shown and pull the WLAN Mini PCI card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 7 348376-B22.book Page 8 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM English Information and Updates HP strongly recommends that you install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini PCI card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a Softpaq. You will download the Softpaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select the download drivers and software radio button, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook Documentation CD or Tablet PC Documentation CD for further product details. 8 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 9 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM German Before You Begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a Mini PCI device authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Help and Support Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Save your work, exit all applications, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power cord. 4. Remove the battery pack. 5. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the Mini PCI slot location. Access the Mini PCI slot. The Mini PCI slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. Installation Guide 9 348376-B22.book Page 10 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM German Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. If your computer has a WLAN Mini PCI card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 10 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 11 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM German 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1 and press the Mini PCI card down 2 until the side latches snap into place. Installation Guide 11 348376-B22.book Page 12 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM German 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the Mini PCI card. The gray

(aux) cable connects to the antenna connector closest to the edge of the Mini PCI card, and the black (main) cable connects to the antenna connector closer to the center of the card, as shown in the following illustration. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If antenna cable is inserted into connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before You Begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. This could reduce wireless performance or cause the Mini PCI device to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 12 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 13 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM German Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software The installation CD included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the Mini PCI card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the CD may be available. Refer to the Information and Updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard is displayed.) 3. Insert the WLAN software CD included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer. (The Found New Hardware wizard installs the device driver from the CD.) If the Found New Hardware wizard does not automatically load the driver from the CD, follow the prompts to point the wizard to the CD drive to install the device driver) Installation of the device driver is complete. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Atheros Client Utility or Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. Both Wireless LAN utilities are located on the WLAN Software CD included with your option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 13 348376-B22.book Page 14 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM German Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the Mini PCI card by lifting the cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage or break off the connector. 14 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 15 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM German 3. Pull the release latches 1 in the direction shown and pull the WLAN Mini PCI card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 15 348376-B22.book Page 16 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM German Information and Updates HP strongly recommends that you install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini PCI card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a Softpaq. You will download the Softpaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select the download drivers and software radio button, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook Documentation CD or Tablet PC Documentation CD for further product details. 16 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 17 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Spanish (Latin American) Before You Begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a Mini PCI device authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Help and Support Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Save your work, exit all applications, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power cord. 4. Remove the battery pack. 5. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the Mini PCI slot location. Access the Mini PCI slot. The Mini PCI slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. Installation Guide 17 348376-B22.book Page 18 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Spanish (Latin American) Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. If your computer has a WLAN Mini PCI card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 18 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 19 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Spanish (Latin American) 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1 and press the Mini PCI card down 2 until the side latches snap into place. Installation Guide 19 348376-B22.book Page 20 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Spanish (Latin American) 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the Mini PCI card. The gray

(aux) cable connects to the antenna connector closest to the edge of the Mini PCI card, and the black (main) cable connects to the antenna connector closer to the center of the card, as shown in the following illustration. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If antenna cable is inserted into connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before You Begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. This could reduce wireless performance or cause the Mini PCI device to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 20 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 21 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Spanish (Latin American) Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software The installation CD included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the Mini PCI card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the CD may be available. Refer to the Information and Updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard is displayed.) 3. Insert the WLAN software CD included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer. (The Found New Hardware wizard installs the device driver from the CD.) If the Found New Hardware wizard does not automatically load the driver from the CD, follow the prompts to point the wizard to the CD drive to install the device driver) Installation of the device driver is complete. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Atheros Client Utility or Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. Both Wireless LAN utilities are located on the WLAN Software CD included with your option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 21 348376-B22.book Page 22 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Spanish (Latin American) Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the Mini PCI card by lifting the cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage or break off the connector. 22 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 23 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Spanish (Latin American) 3. Pull the release latches 1 in the direction shown and pull the WLAN Mini PCI card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 23 348376-B22.book Page 24 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Spanish (Latin American) Information and Updates HP strongly recommends that you install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini PCI card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a Softpaq. You will download the Softpaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select the download drivers and software radio button, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook Documentation CD or Tablet PC Documentation CD for further product details. 24 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 25 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM French Before You Begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a Mini PCI device authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Help and Support Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Save your work, exit all applications, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power cord. 4. Remove the battery pack. 5. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the Mini PCI slot location. Access the Mini PCI slot. The Mini PCI slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. Installation Guide 25 348376-B22.book Page 26 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM French Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. If your computer has a WLAN Mini PCI card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 26 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 27 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM French 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1 and press the Mini PCI card down 2 until the side latches snap into place. Installation Guide 27 348376-B22.book Page 28 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM French 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the Mini PCI card. The gray

(aux) cable connects to the antenna connector closest to the edge of the Mini PCI card, and the black (main) cable connects to the antenna connector closer to the center of the card, as shown in the following illustration. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If antenna cable is inserted into connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before You Begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. This could reduce wireless performance or cause the Mini PCI device to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 28 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 29 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM French Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software The installation CD included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the Mini PCI card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the CD may be available. Refer to the Information and Updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard is displayed.) 3. Insert the WLAN software CD included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer. (The Found New Hardware wizard installs the device driver from the CD.) If the Found New Hardware wizard does not automatically load the driver from the CD, follow the prompts to point the wizard to the CD drive to install the device driver) Installation of the device driver is complete. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Atheros Client Utility or Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. Both Wireless LAN utilities are located on the WLAN Software CD included with your option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 29 348376-B22.book Page 30 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM French Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the Mini PCI card by lifting the cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage or break off the connector. 30 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 31 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM French 3. Pull the release latches 1 in the direction shown and pull the WLAN Mini PCI card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 31 348376-B22.book Page 32 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM French Information and Updates HP strongly recommends that you install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini PCI card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a Softpaq. You will download the Softpaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select the download drivers and software radio button, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook Documentation CD or Tablet PC Documentation CD for further product details. 32 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 33 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Italian Before You Begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a Mini PCI device authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Help and Support Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Save your work, exit all applications, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power cord. 4. Remove the battery pack. 5. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the Mini PCI slot location. Access the Mini PCI slot. The Mini PCI slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. Installation Guide 33 348376-B22.book Page 34 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Italian Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. If your computer has a WLAN Mini PCI card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 34 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 35 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Italian 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1 and press the Mini PCI card down 2 until the side latches snap into place. Installation Guide 35 348376-B22.book Page 36 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Italian 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the Mini PCI card. The gray

(aux) cable connects to the antenna connector closest to the edge of the Mini PCI card, and the black (main) cable connects to the antenna connector closer to the center of the card, as shown in the following illustration. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If antenna cable is inserted into connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before You Begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. This could reduce wireless performance or cause the Mini PCI device to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 36 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 37 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Italian Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software The installation CD included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the Mini PCI card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the CD may be available. Refer to the Information and Updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard is displayed.) 3. Insert the WLAN software CD included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer. (The Found New Hardware wizard installs the device driver from the CD.) If the Found New Hardware wizard does not automatically load the driver from the CD, follow the prompts to point the wizard to the CD drive to install the device driver) Installation of the device driver is complete. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Atheros Client Utility or Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. Both Wireless LAN utilities are located on the WLAN Software CD included with your option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 37 348376-B22.book Page 38 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Italian Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the Mini PCI card by lifting the cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage or break off the connector. 38 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 39 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Italian 3. Pull the release latches 1 in the direction shown and pull the WLAN Mini PCI card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 39 348376-B22.book Page 40 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Italian Information and Updates HP strongly recommends that you install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini PCI card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a Softpaq. You will download the Softpaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select the download drivers and software radio button, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook Documentation CD or Tablet PC Documentation CD for further product details. 40 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 41 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Japanese Before You Begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a Mini PCI device authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Help and Support Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Save your work, exit all applications, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power cord. 4. Remove the battery pack. 5. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the Mini PCI slot location. Access the Mini PCI slot. The Mini PCI slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. Installation Guide 41 348376-B22.book Page 42 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Japanese Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. If your computer has a WLAN Mini PCI card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 42 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 43 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Japanese 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1 and press the Mini PCI card down 2 until the side latches snap into place. Installation Guide 43 348376-B22.book Page 44 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Japanese 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the Mini PCI card. The gray

(aux) cable connects to the antenna connector closest to the edge of the Mini PCI card, and the black (main) cable connects to the antenna connector closer to the center of the card, as shown in the following illustration. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If antenna cable is inserted into connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before You Begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. This could reduce wireless performance or cause the Mini PCI device to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 44 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 45 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Japanese Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software The installation CD included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the Mini PCI card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the CD may be available. Refer to the Information and Updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard is displayed.) 3. Insert the WLAN software CD included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer. (The Found New Hardware wizard installs the device driver from the CD.) If the Found New Hardware wizard does not automatically load the driver from the CD, follow the prompts to point the wizard to the CD drive to install the device driver) Installation of the device driver is complete. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Atheros Client Utility or Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. Both Wireless LAN utilities are located on the WLAN Software CD included with your option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 45 348376-B22.book Page 46 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Japanese Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the Mini PCI card by lifting the cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage or break off the connector. 46 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 47 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Japanese 3. Pull the release latches 1 in the direction shown and pull the WLAN Mini PCI card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 47 348376-B22.book Page 48 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Japanese Information and Updates HP strongly recommends that you install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini PCI card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a Softpaq. You will download the Softpaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select the download drivers and software radio button, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook Documentation CD or Tablet PC Documentation CD for further product details. 48 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 49 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Korean Before You Begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a Mini PCI device authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Help and Support Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Save your work, exit all applications, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power cord. 4. Remove the battery pack. 5. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the Mini PCI slot location. Access the Mini PCI slot. The Mini PCI slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. Installation Guide 49 348376-B22.book Page 50 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Korean Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. If your computer has a WLAN Mini PCI card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 50 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 51 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Korean 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1 and press the Mini PCI card down 2 until the side latches snap into place. Installation Guide 51 348376-B22.book Page 52 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Korean 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the Mini PCI card. The gray

(aux) cable connects to the antenna connector closest to the edge of the Mini PCI card, and the black (main) cable connects to the antenna connector closer to the center of the card, as shown in the following illustration. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If antenna cable is inserted into connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before You Begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. This could reduce wireless performance or cause the Mini PCI device to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 52 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 53 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Korean Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software The installation CD included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the Mini PCI card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the CD may be available. Refer to the Information and Updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard is displayed.) 3. Insert the WLAN software CD included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer. (The Found New Hardware wizard installs the device driver from the CD.) If the Found New Hardware wizard does not automatically load the driver from the CD, follow the prompts to point the wizard to the CD drive to install the device driver) Installation of the device driver is complete. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Atheros Client Utility or Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. Both Wireless LAN utilities are located on the WLAN Software CD included with your option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 53 348376-B22.book Page 54 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Korean Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the Mini PCI card by lifting the cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage or break off the connector. 54 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 55 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Korean 3. Pull the release latches 1 in the direction shown and pull the WLAN Mini PCI card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 55 348376-B22.book Page 56 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Korean Information and Updates HP strongly recommends that you install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini PCI card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a Softpaq. You will download the Softpaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select the download drivers and software radio button, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook Documentation CD or Tablet PC Documentation CD for further product details. 56 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 57 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM S Chinese Before You Begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a Mini PCI device authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Help and Support Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Save your work, exit all applications, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power cord. 4. Remove the battery pack. 5. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the Mini PCI slot location. Access the Mini PCI slot. The Mini PCI slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. Installation Guide 57 348376-B22.book Page 58 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM S Chinese Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. If your computer has a WLAN Mini PCI card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 58 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 59 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM S Chinese 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1 and press the Mini PCI card down 2 until the side latches snap into place. Installation Guide 59 348376-B22.book Page 60 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM S Chinese 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the Mini PCI card. The gray

(aux) cable connects to the antenna connector closest to the edge of the Mini PCI card, and the black (main) cable connects to the antenna connector closer to the center of the card, as shown in the following illustration. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If antenna cable is inserted into connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before You Begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. This could reduce wireless performance or cause the Mini PCI device to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 60 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 61 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM S Chinese Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software The installation CD included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the Mini PCI card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the CD may be available. Refer to the Information and Updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard is displayed.) 3. Insert the WLAN software CD included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer. (The Found New Hardware wizard installs the device driver from the CD.) If the Found New Hardware wizard does not automatically load the driver from the CD, follow the prompts to point the wizard to the CD drive to install the device driver) Installation of the device driver is complete. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Atheros Client Utility or Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. Both Wireless LAN utilities are located on the WLAN Software CD included with your option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 61 348376-B22.book Page 62 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM S Chinese Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the Mini PCI card by lifting the cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage or break off the connector. 62 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 63 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM S Chinese 3. Pull the release latches 1 in the direction shown and pull the WLAN Mini PCI card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 63 348376-B22.book Page 64 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM S Chinese Information and Updates HP strongly recommends that you install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini PCI card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a Softpaq. You will download the Softpaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select the download drivers and software radio button, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook Documentation CD or Tablet PC Documentation CD for further product details. 64 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 65 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM T Chinese Before You Begin CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system and the display of a warning message, install only a Mini PCI device authorized for use in your computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country. If you install a device and then receive a warning message, remove the device to restore computer functionality. Then contact Customer Care. For information about contacting Customer Care, refer to the printed Help and Support Guide included with your computer. Before you begin any installation or removal procedures:

1. Save your work, exit all applications, and shut down the computer. If you are not sure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power cord. 4. Remove the battery pack. 5. Refer to the documentation included with your computer to Identify the Mini PCI slot location. Access the Mini PCI slot. The Mini PCI slot can usually be accessed via a panel on the bottom of the computer but sometimes it is located beneath the keyboard. Installation Guide 65 348376-B22.book Page 66 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM T Chinese Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. If your computer has a WLAN Mini PCI card currently installed, you must remove it before installing the new card. Refer to the Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card section. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Remove the plastic covers (if applicable) from the 2 antenna connector cables in the system. 66 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 67 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM T Chinese 3. Insert the card into the slot at an angle 1 and press the Mini PCI card down 2 until the side latches snap into place. Installation Guide 67 348376-B22.book Page 68 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM T Chinese 4. Connect the 2 antenna cables to the Mini PCI card. The gray

(aux) cable connects to the antenna connector closest to the edge of the Mini PCI card, and the black (main) cable connects to the antenna connector closer to the center of the card, as shown in the following illustration. When connecting the antenna cables, be sure to connect the cables straight down and press firmly until they are fully seated. If antenna cable is inserted into connector at an angle, the center pin of the antenna connector could be damaged. 5. To complete the procedure, reverse the steps in the Before You Begin section. Be careful not to pinch the cables or damage the connectors. This could reduce wireless performance or cause the Mini PCI device to function improperly. Tuck any excess cable inside the system enclosure. 68 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 69 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM T Chinese Installing the WLAN Mini PCI Card Software The installation CD included in this option kit contains the necessary WLAN software and drivers for the Mini PCI card. To install the WLAN software:

Updates to the software contained on the CD may be available. Refer to the Information and Updates section of this guide for instructions on downloading and installing the updated software. 1. Turn on the computer. 2. Log on to the system. (The Found New Hardware wizard is displayed.) 3. Insert the WLAN software CD included with this option kit into the optical drive of the computer. (The Found New Hardware wizard installs the device driver from the CD.) If the Found New Hardware wizard does not automatically load the driver from the CD, follow the prompts to point the wizard to the CD drive to install the device driver) Installation of the device driver is complete. If you are using Microsoft Windows 2000, or if your wireless network requires Cisco Client Extensions (such as LEAP), you must also install the appropriate Wireless LAN utility (Atheros Client Utility or Intel ProSET) to configure the WLAN device correctly. Both Wireless LAN utilities are located on the WLAN Software CD included with your option kit. If you have problems with the installation, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 69 348376-B22.book Page 70 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM T Chinese Removing a WLAN Mini PCI Card CAUTION: To prevent electrostatic discharge from damaging electronic components, discharge yourself of static electricity by touching a grounded metal object. 1. Follow the procedures in the Before You Begin section. 2. Carefully disconnect the 2 antenna cables from the Mini PCI card by lifting the cable connector with a fingernail or small screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not pull on the antenna cable to remove it. Grip and pull only on the connector itself. Pulling on the cable can damage or break off the connector. 70 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 71 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM T Chinese 3. Pull the release latches 1 in the direction shown and pull the WLAN Mini PCI card up 2 and out 3 at an angle. If you have problems with the removal, contact your network administrator for assistance. Installation Guide 71 348376-B22.book Page 72 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM T Chinese Information and Updates HP strongly recommends that you install any software upgrades that are available from HP for your WLAN Mini PCI card. Most software at the HP Web site is packaged in a compressed file called a Softpaq. You will download the Softpaq and save it to your hard drive. To obtain software upgrades:

1. Visit the HP Web site at www.hp.com/support. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to identify your country or region. 3. Select the download drivers and software radio button, and then enter the product information for your computer series name and device. Refer to the Notebook Documentation CD or Tablet PC Documentation CD for further product details. 72 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 73 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Regulatory Notices In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, etc. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this device, please ask for authorization to use it prior to turning it on. U.S. Wireless Notice WARNING: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antenna should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches) during normal operation, including when the computer display is closed. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15- to 5.25-GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. Installation Guide 73 348376-B22.book Page 74 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Regulatory Notices Canadian Wireless Notice Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. European Union Wireless Notice This notice is for wireless LAN radio products that will be used indoors, specifically in the home and office environment operating in the 2.4-GHz and 5.0-GHz band. 0336 0682 0984 74 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 75 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Declaration of Conformity Regulatory Notices This product complies with the following EU directives:

Low Voltage Directive (72/73/EEC) EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC) CE compliance of this equipment is valid only if powered with a CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European Norms (in parentheses are the equivalent international standards and regulations):

EN 55022 (CISPR 22)Electromagnetic interference EN 55024 (IEC 61000-4-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11) Electromagnetic immunity EN 61000-3-2 (IEC 61000-3-2)Power line harmonics EN 61000-3-3 (IEC 61000-3-3)Power line flicker EN 60950 (IEC 60950)Product safety EN 300 328-2Data transmission equipment operating in the 2.4-GHz ISM band and using 2.4-GHz radio equipment using spread spectrum techniques EN 301 489-1, -17General EMC requirements for radio equipment EN 301 893Broadband Radio Access Networks (BRAN);

5-GHz high performance RLAN The 2.4-GHz and 5.0-GHz radio functionality of this product may be used in the following EU, EU candidate, and EFTA countries:

Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. Installation Guide 75 348376-B22.book Page 76 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Regulatory Notices France Lutilisation de cet equipement (2.4GHz Wireless LAN) est soumise certaines restrictions : cet equipement peut tre utilis linterieur dun batiment en utilisant toutes les frequences de 2400 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 1-13). Pour une utilisation en environnement exterieur, vous devez utiliser les frequences comprises entre 2454 a 2483.5MHz (Chaine 10-13). Pour les dernires restrictions, voir http://www.art-telecom.fr. Italy Enecessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per luso del prodotto. Verifici per favore con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze. License required for use. Verify with your dealer or directly with General Direction for Frequency Planning and Management (Direzione Generale Pianificazione e Gestione Frequenze). Indian Wireless Notice The India Telegraph Act of 1885 requires that an IEEE 802.11a or IEEE 802.11g wireless LAN end user obtain a license. To obtain this license, please contact The Wireless Planning &

Coordination Wing, Ministry of Communications, Sanchar Ghavan New Delhi. Brazilian Wireless Notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. 76 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 77 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Japanese Wireless Notice Regulatory Notices Installation Guide 77 348376-B22.book Page 78 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Regulatory Notices Federal Communications Commission Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard Company may void the users authority to operate the equipment. 78 Installation Guide 348376-B22.book Page 79 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM Regulatory Notices Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo (United States Only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions regarding your product that are not related to this declaration, write to:

Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this declaration, write to:

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 Or call 281-514-3333. To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. Canadian Notice (Avis Canadien) This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Installation Guide 79 348376-B22.book Page 80 Friday, June 25, 2004 8:35 AM